''mm:  ■" 


^'?.v^■ 


J    /^ 


Digitized  by  tlie  Internet  Arcliive 
•     in  2007  witli  funding  from 
IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


littp://www.archive.Qrg/detai|s/eclectiGshc)rtfianp0crosiala 


THE  ADVANTAGES  OF  ECLECTIC  SHORT-HAND. 


We  claim  that  the  demonstration  of  the  following  four  propo- 
sitions is  an  unanswerable  argument  why  the  short-hand  student 
should  adopt  Eclectic  Short-hand : 

1.  It  is  the  briefest.  3.     It  is  the  easiest  to  write. 

2.  It  is  the  simplest.  4.     It  is  the  most  legible. 

DEMOXSTBATION   OF   THE   PROPOSITIONS. 

Prop.  1. —  In  December,  1880,  Browne's  Phonographic  Monthly, 
then  the  leading  stenographic  journal,  published  comparisons  of 
twenty-five  of  the  best  systems  in  existence,  giving  the  writing,  in 
all  the  systems,  of  a  stanza  of  five  lines.  The  Eclectic  writing  of 
the  stanza  contained,  by  actual  computation,  14  per  cent  less  than 
the  briefest  of  the  otliers  (Graham's),  and  49  per  cent  less  than  the 
longest  (Ijindsley's),  and  was  30  per  cent  briefer  than  the  average  of 
all  of  them ;  hence  the  briefest  system. 

Prop.  3. —  It  is  the  only  system  of  the  twenty-five  which  is  based 
on  the  English  alphabet.  It  contains  less  than  fifty  word  signs,  and 
has  no  exceptions  to  rules;  hence  the  simplest  system. 

Prop.  3. —  It  is  tlie  only  system  of  the  twenty-five  which  dis- 
penses with  vertical  characters,  writing  with  characters  in  three 
directions  instead  of  four,  and  the  only  system  of  connective  vowels 
similar  in  form  to  the  consonants,  and  with  a  single  exception  the 
only  light-line  system;  hence  the  easiest  system  to  write. 

Prop.  4. —  It  is  the  only  system  of  the  twenty-five  that  makes  as 
free  use  of  vowels  as  of  consonants,  and  while  writing  words  with 
less  strokes,  still  by  its  principles  writes  words  more  fully  and  with 
less  memorizing  of  word  signs  than  any  other  of  the  twenty-five. 
It  also  has  no  vertical  strokes  to  become  confounded  in  rapid  writ- 
ing with  similar  oblique  characters;  heiice  the  most  legible  system. 

That  tlie  force  of  our  demonstration  may  be  more  apparent,  we 
give  the  writing  of  the  Lord's  Prayer  by  Pitman,  Graham,  Munson, 
Lindsley,  and  Eclectic  Short-hand,  and  we  only  ask  attention  to 
the  more  uniform  direction  of  the  lines  in  the  Eclectic,  their  easier 
combinations,  and  the  fewer  number  of  strokes,  and  remark  that,  at 
the  same  time,  the  Eclectic  writing  is  more  full  than  that  of  either 
of  the  others.     Pitman  has  111  strokes,  Graham  85,  Munson  88, 


ADVANTAGES  OF  ECLECTIC  SHORT-HAND— ConVd. 

Lindsley  95,  Eclectic  66.  Adding  the  strokes  of  the  first  four  we 
have  379;  divide  this  sum  by  four,  and  we  have  94,  the  average 
number  of  characters  by  Pitman,  Graham,  Munson,  and  Lindsley ; 
from  this  average  subtract  the  characters  required  in  the  Eclectic 
writing,  and  we  have  28,  which  is  42  per  cent,  of  the  Eclectic 
writing. 

Pi tnt  a  72  . 


-^■-v. 

^v-' 

.--^-(r^'^ 

•(^-'^)/ 

•^"--^(^ 

^^wv^vv^^^ 

.^^^ 

X 

Cro?7Qf7t  . 

r/?2n7so?i. 

'y- 

2i'i.^r- 

■^"^Xr 

w        s 

..--3^ 

•~^^~^^\,L- 

o,_                              ^ 

Er?ec//c  J/> 

'/j?^^a?id. 

^/ 


-^^^-.^ 


A   SUCCESS  IN   AMANUENSIS  WORK. 

"With  less  than  t'wo  months'  instruction,  I  could  report  any 

ordinarily  rapid  [Speaker."— C.  Q.  Thorpe,  Chariton.  loiva. 

"With  a  comparatively  small  amount  of  study,  in  three 
montlis  I  acquired  a  speed  of  135  words  per  minute." — J.  E.  Challenger, 
Stenographer  tilth  Philadelphia  and  Reading  Railroad,  Philadelphia. 

"After  one  month's  lessons  in  Eclectic  Short-hand,  and  some 

daily  practice  for  two  montlis,  I  could  easily  write  150  words  a  minute."— E. 
Eloisk  Baker,  Stenographer  with  The  Current,  Chicago. 

"At  the  end  of  four  vreeks'  study  I  found  myself  able  to 

write  faster,  and  to  transcribe  more  readily,  than  I  could  after  studying  Mun- 
son's  system  four  months.  I  studied  Munsou  under  a  very  able  etenographer. 
This  system  1  have  studied  alone.''— R.  G.  Stripe,  Stenographer  with  Union 
Pacific  Railway,  Omaha. 

"After  less  than  tvro  vreeks'  instruction  in  Eclectic  Short- 
hand, without  any  previous  knowledge  except  a  partial  knowledge  of  the  prin- 
ciples, I  was  able  to  use  it  with  the  greatest  satisfaction  in  general  correspond- 
ence work,  and  have  never  experienced  the  least  trouble  in  transcribing  my 
notes."— W.  A.  Smollinger,  Covenant  Mutual  Benefit  Ass'n,  Galesburg,  III. 

"The  comparative  ease  vrith  which  the  Eclectic  Short- hand 

is  written  is  truly  wonderful.  I  am  now  writing  160  to  170  words  per  minute." 
— \V.  W.  White,  Stenographer  to  N.  &  G.  Taylor  Co..  Philadelphia. 

"I  have  frequently  vrritten  at  the  rate  of  180  •words  a  min- 
ute, afterward  reading  my  notes  with  the  same  facility  as  though  taken  at  a 
moderate  speed."— Johk  F.  Stetler,  1921  Walnut  St.,  Philadelphia. 

"I  commenced  the  study  of  Eclectic  Short-hand  the  12th  of 

June,  and  on  the  15th  of  August  following  1  accepted  a  position  as  amanuensis 
with  one  of  the  largest  firms  in  Chicago,  which  ix)sition  I  still  hold.  The  sys- 
tem is  easily  acquired,  and  is  just  the  thing  for  practical  worA."— Jennie  A. 
Wells,  Stenographer  to  McCormick  Harvesting  Machine  Co.,  Chicago. 

"  I  have  had  an  Eclectic  employed  in  my  office  for  over  a 

year,  and  I  have  never  yet  had  to  have  a  transcript  rewritten  or  corrected  on 
account  of  misinterpretation  of  the  notes.  From  the  experience  I  have  had 
with  the  system,  I  consider  it  one  that  can  be  rapidly  written,  and  read  like 
print.'"- J.  E,  Stuart,  Postofflce  Inspector,  Chicago. 

The  lady  referred  to,  in  two  months'  study,  reported  and  transcribed  a  speech 
delivered  in  court  at  the  rate  of  1,017  words  the  first  five  minutes,  or  an  average 
of  over  200  words  per  minute. 

"I  have   devoted  one-half  of  my  time   during:  a  period  of 

three  months  to  the  study  of  Eclectic  Short- hand,  and  have  had  occasion  to 
apply  it  daily  in  taking  from  rapid  dictation  letters  pertaining  to  five  distinct 
branches  of  business,  frequently  where  the  mistake  of  one  word  would  have  been 
vital  to  the  transaction  under  consideration,  and  have  found  the  system  rapid, 
legible,  and  perfectly  reliable.  I  believe  it  simply  impossible  to  overestimate 
its  utility  to  anyone  contemplating  a  thorough  business  education. — C.  R, 
Smith,  North  Dakota  Loan  and  Trust  Co.,  Jamestown,- Dak. 


A  SUCCESS  IN  COURT  REPORTING 

WHERE  THE  GREATEST  ACCURACY  AND  SPEED  ARE  REQUIRED. 

From  the  Hon.  J.  J.  Phillips,  Judg'e  of  Fifth  Circuit  Court,  111. : 

"I  have  had  reporters  on  the  Chicago  Times,  Missouri  Republican,  and  St.  Louis 
Globe- Democrat  report  speeches  made  by  myself,  whose  work  was  nothing  like 
as  correct  as  that  done  by  Eclectic  students  in  court  under  my  observation." 

From  the  Hon.  Ovren  T.  Beeves,  Judge  of  Eleventh  Circuit 

Court,  111. :  "  Mrs.  C.  P.  Remine,  an  Eclectic  writer,  has  been  engaged  as  a  short- 
hand reporter  in  this  Circuit  Court  several  years.  I  have  examined  the  tran- 
scripts of  her  notes  taken  in  cases  tried  by  me,  and  I  regard  her  a  competent 
short-hand  reporter  in  taking  evidence." 

From  the  Hon.  N.  F.  Pillsbury,  Judgre  of  Eleventh  Circuit 

Court,  111. :  "After  a  term  of  about  three  months,  one  lesson  daily,  in  Eclectic 
Short-hand,  my  daughter  is  able  to  correctly  report  as  fast  as  an  average  speaker 
will  talk,  and  appears  to  have  no  difficulty  in  reading  the  notes  afterwards." 

From  Oen.  John  McNulta,  Master  in  Chancery,  Bloomingrton, 

111. :  "In  October,  1883,  Miss  Shinn  was  called  upon  to  report  a  case  before  me. 
Her  services  were  called  for  with  much  reluctance  on  my  part,  as  I  was  informed 
that  she  had  devoted  but  about  three  months  to  the  study  of  Eclectic  Short- 
hand. Since  that  time  she  has  done  substantially  all  the  reporting  of  the  con- 
tested chancery  cases  before  me.  Her  speed  is  adequate,  and  her  reports  are 
absolutely  accurate  verbatim  reports.  She  rends  her  notes  when  called  upon 
with  as  much  ease  and  facility  as  she  would  a  printed  article  from  a  newspaper, 
and  reads  old  notes  with  as  much  ease  as  fresh  ones.  I  have  never  known  a 
stenographer  who  wrote  more  accurately,  or  who  read  with  as  much  facility." 

From    Miss   Mary   S.    Minor,    Court    Stenogrrapher,    Dallas, 

Texas:  "After  a  series  of  six  lessons,  and  a  few  hours'  daily  study  for  three 
months,  I  was  able  to  report  court  testitnonij,  and  to  read  my  notes  as  readily 
as  long-hand.  Such  is  the  simplicity  of  its  construction,  the  flexibility  of  its 
lines,  and  its  perfect  legibility,  that  the  work  necessary  to  attain  verbatim 
speed  is  only  pustime.''     [Miss  Minor  writes  180  words  a  minute.] 

From  Sims  Ely,  Oflacial  Reporter  Eighth  Judicial  District, 

Kas.:  "Having  used  the  Eclectic  system  in  court  reporting,  I  speak  advisedly 
when  I  say  that  it  is  fully  capable  of  meeting  evenj  j)ossible  requirement.  As 
to  the  time  required  to  learn  the  system,  I  regard  it  as  settled  beyond  contro- 
versy—not alone  by  my  experience,  but  that  of  others  known  to  me— that  all 
the  proficiency  nciuisite  for  general  reporting  of  every  description,  can  be 
acquired  in  three  months  of  constant  study." 

From  R.  L.  Davidson,  Oflacial  Reporter  Nineteenth  Judicial 

Distiict,  Kas. :  "In  my  examination  for  this  position  I  averaged  1G9  words  per 
minute  for  five  consecutive  minutes."     [He  had  studied  but  ten  weeks.] 

From  E.  B.  Sherman,  Master  in  Chancery,  Circuit  Court  of  the 

U.  S.Chicago:  "Miss  Kate  S.  Ilohnes  has  been  doing  stenographic  work  in  my 
office  for  several  m<niths,  and  although  without  previous  experience,  except  in 
ordinary  oflice  matters,  is  doing  very  satisfactory  work.  Judged  by  its  practical 
results,  the  Eclectic  system  must  possess  some  positive  merit,  and  one  desiring 
to  aciiuire  the  stcnoLTraijhic  art  should  carefully  examine  its  claims.'" 


DIAGRAM 

SHOWING  THE  DERIVATION 

OI"   THE 

ALPHABET  OF  ECLECTIC  SHORT-HAND 

PBOM 

FLATTENED  ELLIPSES, 

THE 

MOST  EASILY  AND  RAPIDLY  EXECUTED  OP  ALL  OUTLINES. 


3?*=^-^r-*^     ^  ^  ^  I 


FACILE  LINES,  RAPID  MOVEMENT,  INTERDEPENDENT. 


ECLECTIC  SHORT-HAND: 

WRITING  BY  PRINCIPLES  INSTEAD  OF 
ARBITRARY  SIGNS, 

FOR  GENERAL  USE  AND  VERBATIM  REPORTING. 


By  J.  GEO.  CROSS,  M.  A., 

PRESIDENT  OP   THE   CENTRAL   COLLEGE   OP  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND,   CHICAeO. 


■WRITING  IS  THE  COS9KBTATOR  OP  THOUGHT. 


SIXTEENTH  EDITION. 
THOROUGHLY  REVISED  AND  COMPLETED. 


CHICAGO: 
S.   C.   GRIGGS   AND   COMPANY. 

18S8. 


COFTBIGHT,  1878, 

By  8.  C.  GRIGGS  AND  COMPANY. 


Copyright,  1882, 
By  S.  C.  GRIGGS  AND  COMPANY. 


Copyright,  1885, 
By  S.  C.  GRIGGS  AND  COMPANY. 


/^^<o\ 

I     KNI3HT    &   LEOHARg  .  | 


TO  GEORGE  TEAGER,  M.A. 

FOR  Hie  ARDENT  ESPOUSAL  OP  THIS  8T8TEM  OP  PHONOGRAPHY  IN  ITS  TOFAIICT, 

AND  HIS  SUCCESSPUL  EFFORTS  AS  ITS  CHIEF  APOSTLE,  THIS 
BOOK    IS    APPECTIONATELT    DEDICATED. 


467164 


PREFACE. 


This  system  of  short-hand  writing  has  been  before  the 
public  long  enough  to  demonstrate,  or  to  refute,  the  claim 
that  it  is  the  easiest  to  learn,  the  simplest  in  structure,  the 
briefest,  and  yet  the  fullest  phonetic  writing  of  the  language 
which  has  yet  been  devised,  and  it  still  lives. 

This  edition  is  a  thorough  revision  of  all  the  previous 
editions,  containing  such  modifications  of  the  several  prin- 
ciples and  expedients  as  practice  has  shown  to  be  valuable. 

The  plates  for  this  edition  are  entirely  new,  and  are 
made  by  the  phototype  process.  Not  a  line  of  engraving, 
but  everything  is  as  if  fresh  from  the  pen  of  the  rapid 
writer.  Written  at  a  rapid  rate,  they  represent  such  work 
as  is  of  the  greatest  value  to  the  learner,  because  they  are 
easy  and  rapid,  instead  of  labored  and  slowly  engraved  out- 
lines. The  learner  will  see  in  these  sample  pages  of  a  pure, 
natural,  easy  style  of  reportorial  short-hand  precisely  what 
he  must  be  able  to  do,  and  the  reading  of  these  will  be  in 
effect  the  same  as  reading  his  own  perfectly  written  verbatim 
notes. 

The  last  vestige  of  vertical  characters  is  eliminated  from 
this  edition,  even  the  vertical  ticks.  All  the  characters  now 
are  either  left  oblique,  right  oblique,  or  horizontal,  and  so 
similar  to  the  movements  of  long-hand,  to  which  the  hand  is 
already  accustomed,  that  the  ease  with  which  they  are  written 
is  worthy  of  attention.  The  author  feels  safe  in  character- 
izing it  a  free-hand  short-hand. 

7 


8  PBEFACB. 

The  modifications  in  chai-acters  and  contractions  which 
have  been  made  are  those  which  have  appeared  in  "  The  Ex- 
ponent "  during  the  last  two  years,  and  have  been  generally 
adopted  by  writers  of  the  system. 

The  diphthong  eu  has  been  added  to  the  e  position. 

All  the  contractions  of  the  system  are  now  merged  in  a 
chapter  on  "  Syllabication,"  as  they  provide  means  by  which 
almost  all  syllables  are  expressed  by  a  single,  or  a  contin- 
uous character.  This  is  not  a  new  fact,  or  series  of  facts, 
but  a  new  dressing  of  the  established  principles  of  the  sys- 
tem, which  will  commend  itself  to  all  practical  stenogra- 
phers. 

Several  pages  of  new  reading  matter,  phrases,  and  val- 
uable lists  of  words  are  added. 

In  place  of  the  supplement  found  in  several  previous 
editions,  this  has  a  chapter  on  the  amanuensis  and  type- 
writing which  adds  to  the  value  of  the  work. 

Projected  on  a  new  plan,  a  system  of  writing  by  princi- 
ples, or  rules,  without  exceptions,  a  system  almost  without 
word  signs,  writing  words  more  fully,  yet  with  less  sti'okes 
than  any  other,  it  could  not  have  spi'ung  into  being,  full- 
fledged,  but  has  had  a  growth.  When  first  presented  to  the 
public  it  was  favorably  received,  and,  for  a  work  of  its 
character,  has  been  widely  studied.  It  is  now  practically 
employed  in  commercial,  legal,  and  general  reporting  in  all 
parts  of  the  country. 

The  modifications  of  the  present  edition  are  made  to  add 
stability,  to  give  facility  in  writing  and  reading,  to  lighten, 
if  possible,  the  load  of  the  growing  army  of  toilei'S  with  the 
swift  pen.  The  Author. 

Chicago,  III..  October  31.  1885. 


CONTENTS. 


Page 

Illustrative  Diagram, Frontispiece 

Preface,        ..---.---  7,  8 

CHAPTER  1. 

Position  and  Movement  in  Writing,  Material,  Etc.,  -  13-18 
Lesson  I.     Elementary  Strokes  and  Movement  Exer- 
cises,          19,  20 

"      II,     Alphabet,        -------  21-26 

"    III.     Combining  Letters,  Exercises,         -        -  26,  27 
"     IV.     Combinations  with  Hooks,  Loop  and  Circle, 

Double  Letters,        -        -        -        -        -  28,  29 

"      V.     Shading  for  R, 29-31 

"    VI.     Phonics,  Diphthongs,  c,  k,  y  ANuy,  s  and  2,  q,  x,  31-35 

CHAPTER  II. 

Abbreviated  Spelling, 36 

Rules  of  the  Spelling  Reform  Association,.        -        -  36-39 

Rules  of  "Chicago  Tribune," 39 

Abbreviation, 39,  40 

Pronouncing  Exercise, 41 

CHAPTER  III. 

Syllabification. 

Syllables  Defined, 42-44 

Principle  I.  The  Writing  of  Initial  Consonant  Char- 
acters IN  Such  a  Manner  as  to  Express 
A  Following  Vowel,         -        .        .  44-48 

9 


10 


CONTENTS. 


Principle  II.     The  Writing  of  Initial  Vowel  Charac- 
ters IN  Such  a  Manner  as  to  Express 

A  Following  Consonant,        -        -        .  48-54 

Diphthongs, 54 

Extreme  Positions,  -- 55 

Unruled  Paper, 55 

Vowels,  Long  and  Short, 55,  56 

Principle  III.    Lengthening  the  Long  Characters  to 

Add  m,  n, 56-58 

Enlarging  the  Surface  Characters  to 

Add  t,  d, 58-60 

Principle  IV.     Shortening  the  Short  Characters  to 

Add  t,  d,  -        -        -        -        -        -  60,  61 

A  Making  the  Short  Characters  Minute 

to  Add  m,  n, 61,  63 

Diminishing   the    Surface    Characters 

to  Add  l,ly, 63,  63 

Principle  V.     Unified  Coalescent  Characters,   -        -  63 

Coalescent  r,         .        .        .  63 

Coalescent  I,      -        -        -        -  64 

PI,  U,          -        -        -  64 

Cl,gl,       -        -        -        -  65 

FI,  fly,  ly,  -        -        -  65 

^7,  zl,       -        -        -        -  65 

Coalescent  sp,       .        -        .  66 

Coalescent  sc,  squ,     -        -        -  66 

Coalescent  sc,  soft,       -        -  67 

Coalescent  sn,  sm,     .         -        -  67 

Coalescent  w, —  tw,  thw,  dw,  sw,  67 

Coalescents  xj),  xt,  xc,       -        -  68 

Coalescent  pr,       -        -        -  68 

PRiNctPLE  VI.     Unified  Uncoalescent  Consonants,       -  69 

iv-s,       -------  69 

])-rli,  p-slt,          ..._--  70 

lis,  n-c,  m-s,         -----  71 


CONTENTS. 


11 


Principle  VII.    Hepresentatiox  of  Syllables  by  Their 

Consonants,  -----  71 

Hooks  and  Circles,       -        -        .        -  72 

p  Initial  and  Pinal,   -        -  73,  73 

g  Initial  and  Final,       -        -  73 

Final  y,        -        -        -        -  73 

h,  r  Circle,       .        -        -        -  73 

sh,  ch,  wh,      -        -        -        -  74,  75 
Principle  VIII.     The    Arbitrary  Representation    of 

Syllables, 75 

Prefixes,         -----  76-78 

Saxon  Prefixes,       .        -        -  78 

Latin  Prefixes,  -        -        -  79 

Greek  Prefixes,       .        -        .  79 

Suffixes, 79 

Classified  Suffixes  and  Termi- 
nations — 

By  Signs  Attached,           -  80-82 
By  Signs  Written  across 

Preceding  Characters,  82,  83 

By  Signs  Detached,  -        -  83-88 
Principle  IX.     The    Omission   of   Initial   Letters   or 

Syllables,      -----  88 
Ac,  ag,  oc;  af,  al,  com,  con;  em,  en;  ex; 

h;  in,  im;  re,       -        -        -        -        -  88,  89 


CHAPTER  IV. 

Word  Signs  and  Phrase  Writing,     -        -        -        -  90 

Phrase  Writing,       --------  90 

First  Method,    -------  91,  92 

Second  Method,      -- 93 

Third  Method, 93-95 

Simple  Phrases,      -------  95 

Common  Legal  Phrases,  Key,  -        -        -        -  95,  96 

Correspondence  Phrases,  Key,     -        -        -        -  96,  97 

General  Illustrative  Phrases,  Key,      -        -  98,  99 


12 


CONTENTS. 


Abbreviations,  United  States, 

Synopsis  of  the  Peinciples  of  the  System, 

CHAPTER  V. 
Reading  and  Weiting  Exercises,    - 


100 
101,  102 


103-108 


CHAPTER  VI. 

Shoet-Hand  Vocabulaey. 

Conjunctions  and  Pheases,        ....  109,  110 

Peepositions,    ------  110 

Peonouns,  -------  111 

Verbs,  -            - Ill,  112 

One  Hundred  Words,      -----  113 

Alphabetic  List  of  Words,             ...  113^  II4 

Frequent  Short  Words,             ....  134-136 

Two  Fables,  -Sj^sop,               ....  I37 

CHAPTER  VII. 

Reading  and  Writing  Exercises,          ...  138-182 

CHAPTER   VIII. 

Miscellaneous  Suggestions,  Notation,  Proof  Read- 
ing, Verbatim  and  Legal  Reporting,         -           -  183-199 

CHAPTER  IX. 

Writing  Exercises — Xine  Lessons,     -            -            -  200-228 

CHAPTER  X. 

The  Amanuensis,         -            .            -            .            .  229 

QuALiriiATiONs,      ----.-  230-233 

Important  Suggestions  to  the  Young  Amanuensis,  233-236 

CopviN'G  Letters,               .....  ^  237 

Writi.\(;  :\Lv(;hixes.     -----  238-240 

Skeleton  of  a  Letter.    -            -            -            -            .  240 

Care  of  the  Machine.           -            -            -            -  241-244 


ECLECTIC  SHORT-HAND. 


CHAPTER  I. 


POSITION  AND  MOVEMENT  IN  WRITING. 

To  the  writer  of  short-hand,  as  to  the  long-hand  writer, 
correct  position  is  of  the  utmost  importance;  both  for  its 
influence  upon  the  health,  and  to  promote  ease  and  free- 
dom of  movement.  Without  unrestrained  and  easy  move- 
ment there  can  be  no  boldness,  no  exactness  nor  grace 
in  writing.  There  cannot  be  unrestrained  movement 
without  such  posture  as  will  conduce  to  it. 

Whether,  then,  the  writer  sits  or  stands,  the  position 
of  the  entire  person  should  be  such  as  not  only  to  allow 
the  involuntary  action  of  all  the  vital  organs,  but,  also, 
the  fullest  possible  freedom  of  all  the  muscles  of  the  en- 
tire arm,  hand  and  fingers.  Thus  unrestrained,  writing 
can  be  continued  hours  without  fatigue,  while  simply 
grasping  the  pen  tightly,  or  resting  the  arm,  the  wrist 
or  the  hand  heavily  on  the  desk  is  sufficient  to  cause  un- 
easiness and  fatigue  within  a  few  minutes.  Especially 
will  the  bending  forward  to  the  right  or  to  the  left  of 
the  head,  shoulders,  or  trunk,  so  hinder  the  action  of  the 
vital  forces  as  in  a  short  time  to  cause  a  sense  of  unrest, 
cramping  and  impoverishing  the  style  of   writing,  finally 

13 


14  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

producing  permanent  ungracefulness  in  attitude  and  ac- 
tion, with  an  enervated  and  diseased  condition  of  the  en- 
tire person. 

As  movement  cannot  but  depend  on  the  position  of  the 
writer,  so  the  character  of  the  writing  depends  on  the 
movement.  To  illustrate:  if  the  pen  be  so  held  in  the 
fingers,  and  the  arm  so  placed  on  the  table,  that  the  top 
of  the  pen-holder  points  over  the  shoulder,  then  the  nat- 
ural movement  of  the  fingers  will  produce  writing  of  the 
ordinary  slope,  but  if  the  hand  is  rolled  over  to  the  right, 
so  that  the  pen-holder  points  away  from,  instead  of  to- 
ward, the  person,  the  movement  of  the  fingers  will  nat- 
urally produce  the  back-hand  style  of  writing,  while  hold- 
ing the  pen  so  that  the  holder  is  turned  neither  to  the 
right  nor  the  left,  but  is  held  in  a  line  with  the  arm, 
will  produce  a  style  of  writing  nearly  or  quite  vertical, 
producing  lines  sloped  either  to  the  right  or  left  with 
equal  facility. 

The  last-named  position  is  the  proper  one  for  the 
writer  of  short-hand;  because  the  alphabetic  lines,  instead 
of  following  a  uniform  direction,  as  in  long-hand,  are 
written  in  various  directions,  viz,  horizental,  sloping  to  the 
left,  and  to  the  right ;  and  this  pose  of  the  pen  is  best 
adapted  to  these  varying  movements. 

To  sec-ure  this  position,  lay  the  hand  on  the  desk  so 
that  the  knuckle  of  the  forefinger  will  be  turned  upward, 
the  hand  and  arm  rolling  a  little  to  the  right  from  the 
position  for  long-hand.  The  pen  should  be  held  firmly, 
but  not  tightly,  between  the  thumb  and  first  two  fingers, 
placing  the  end  of  the  thumb  against  the  holder  opposite 
the  tirst  joint  of   the  forefinger.     The  pen  should  extend 


POSITION   AND   MOVEMENT   IN   WRITING.  15 

far  enough  below  the  fingers  to  touch  the  paper  without 
special  effort.  The  third  and  fourth  fingers  should  bend 
under  the  hand  and  away  from  the  first  two,  resting  on 
the  paper,  thus  supporting  the  hand,  and  rendering  the 
movement  of  the  thumb  and  pen-fingers  freer.  The  arm 
and  hand  should  lie  on  the  desk,  with  the  least  possible 
weight,  that  the  movement  in  any  desired  direction  may 
be  unimpeded.  A  heavy  rest  at  any  point  will  hamper 
that  freedom  of  stroke  necessary  to  all  good  writing,  and 
especially  so  to  easy  short-hand.  The  writer  must  learn 
to  avoid  any  rigidity  of  muscles  caused  by  resting  heav- 
ily, holding  the  pen  tightly,  or  stiffening  the  arm,  hand 
or  fingers;  all  of  which  must  be  easy  and  flexible,  as  only 
under  such  conditions  can  the  highest  skill  in  execution 
be  acquired. 

It  is  the  pi'actice  of  some  writers  to  hold  the  pen- 
holder between  the  first  and  second  fingers,  instead  of 
the  thumb  and  forefinger.  This  position  is  sufficient  for 
the  movement  of  the  arm,  but  the  pen  between  the  fingers 
forces  them  apart,  and  the  movement  of  both  is  against 
the  pen-holder,  instead  of  on,  and  in  harmony  with,  each 
other;  hence  it  should  not  be  practiced  in  short-hand,  in 
the  execution  of  which  the  finger  movement  is  so  essen- 
tial. 

A  habit  of  bending  the  fingers  too  much,  can  be  easi- 
ly overcome  by  placing  the  end  of  the  thumb  against  the 
holder,  opposite  the  first  joint  of  the  forefinger,  and  res- 
olutely maintaining  it  in  that  position,  entirely  prevent- 
ing bending  of  the  fingers. 

It  is  essential  that  the  points  of  the  pen  should  press 
equally  on  the  paper.     To  accomplish  this  while  the  hand 


16  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

is  rolled  a  little  to  the  right,  it  will  be  necessary  to  roll 
the  pen  in  the  fingers  a  little  toward  the  thumb.  If  the 
writer  takes  the  pen  in  his  hand  as  above  instructed,  he 
will  see  that  the  right  point  touches  the  paper  first,  and 
if  the  pen  is  a  sharp  one,  it  will  scratch  the  paper  when 
moved.  Let  him  now  press  down  a  little  with  the  thumb, 
thus  rolling  the  pen  to  the  left,  and  the  left  point  of  the 
pen  will  also  touch  the  paper,  its  movement  becoming 
smooth  and  easy. 

In  sitting  at  a  table  to  write,  if  square  before  it, 
place  both  arms  on  it,  leaning  slightly  on  the  left,  thus 
leaving  the  right  arm  free.  Place  the  arm  well  on  the 
desk  across  the  middle  of  the  paper,  and  parallel  with 
its  sides.  Thus  positioned,  it  will  move  with  equal  readi- 
ness to  the  right  or  to  the  left,  and  will  be  perfectly 
buoyant,  like  cork  on  water,  possessing  great  power  for 
protracted  work.  For  a  change  of  position,  and  the  ease 
consequent  to  it,  the  right  side- may  be  turned  obliquely 
toward  the  table,  resting  the  left  hand  on  the  edge  of 
the  table  or  on  the  left  arm  of  the  chair,  sitting  reso- 
lutely erect  to  maintain  a  healthful  posture  and  light- 
ness of  rest. 

The  short-hand  writer  should  frequently  practice  wi'it- 
ing  on  a  book  or  small  board  placed  on  his  knee,  resting 
the  hand  and  arm  only  on  the  ends  of  the  third  and 
fourth  fingers;  he  should  also  write  standing  with  the 
book  or  paper  held  on  his  left  hand,  to  fit  himself  thus 
for  any  emergency  that  may  accidentally  arise. 

Movement, —  In  short-hand,  the  movement  must  be 
both  circumscril)ed  and  exact,  while  it  is  free  and  flow- 
ing.    Flourishing   has  no  place  here;    hence  all  the  exer- 


POSITION"  AND  MOVEMENT   IN  WKITING.  17 

cises  and  all  practice  for  the  development  of  movement, 
while  they  tend  to  freedom,  must  result  in  absolute 
certainty  of  form.  In  long-hand,  it  is  customary  to  give 
large,  flowing,  free  exercises  to  induce  a  bold  and  off-hand 
execution;  but  in  short-hand  no  drill  can  be  better  for 
the  movement  required  than  the  characters  themselves, 
which  should  be  written  singly,  and  combined,  with  a  free 
but  careful  movement,  slowly  at  first,  steadily  increasing 
the  rate  of  speed  as  familiarity  with  their  forms  is 
acquired,  writing  always  in  a  free-hand  manner,  yet 
with  an  uncompromising  purpose  to  secure  exactness  in 
form,  direction  and  size.  The  pen  should  neither  drag 
nor  hurry;  its  movement  never  slow,  but  always  delib- 
erate and  decisive.  Persevering  practice,  with  careful  at- 
tention to  these  points,  will,  by  daily  accretion  of  power, 
finally  impart  skill  to  the  most  obstinate  muscles. 

Pens. —  Use  only  good  ones,  with  fine  but  smooth  firm 
points  and  flexible  nibs.  Such,  with  good  paper  and  good 
ink,  will,  if  properly  handled,  always  produce  satisfactory 
results. 

It  is  impossible  to  specify  any  pen  adapted  to  all 
writers,  as  the  pen  must  necessarily  vaiy  in  flexibility 
and  fineness  with  the  delicacy  and  sensitiveness  of  the 
hand  which  wields  it;  still,  any  hand  will  acquire  power 
faster  and  more  surely  by  the  use  of  a  delicate  and  well 
appointed  instrument  than  with  an  inferior  one.  There 
is  a  magnetism  in  the  action  of  a  good  pen  that  at  once 
lifts  the  hand  to  its  utmost  power. 

The  following  are  used  by  the  author  with  perfect 
satisfaction;  viz:  Gillott^s  Nos.  404,  303,  1,  170;  Ester- 
brook's  No.  128,  with  some  of  the  Spencerian  and  Payson, 


18  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

Dunton  and  Scribner's  pens.  A  gold  pen,  if  adapted  to 
the  hand  and  to  the  style  of  writing  to  be  done,  is 
superior  to  all  others  in  ease  of  action  and  certainty  of 
results.  The  author  has  invented  and  patented  a  first- 
class  combined  fountain  pen,  especially  for  short-hand 
writing,  which  he  is  prepared  to  provide  to  order, 
adapted  to  the  requirements  of  any  hand. 

The  writer  should  not  use  a  heavy,  large  holder,  nor 
one  very  highly  polished,  as  either  will  impair  fi-eedom 
of  movement.  In  selecting  a  holder,  be  careful  to  see 
that  it  does  not,  as  many  cheap  holders  do,  pitch  the 
pen  forward.  When  in  its  place,  the  pen  should  stand 
true  on  a  line  with  the  holder.  Be  careful  in  placing 
it  in  the  holder  to  insert  it  exactly  in  the  middle  of  tht 
slot  and  not  to  one  side  of  it,  as  this  will  materially 
modify  its  action. 

Use  only  first-class  paper  with  the  pen. 

Should  a  pencil  be  used,  let  it  be  a  medium  hard 
one,  as  Faber's  Stenographic  or  Dixon's  Professional,  and 
always  well  sharpened. 

The  pencil  requires  soft  paper,  else  it  is  liable  tc 
slip,    producing    indefinite    lines. 


FUNDAMENTAL    LINES. 


19 


LESSON  I. 

LINES. 

The  line  is  the  shoi'test  distance  between  two  points. 
It  is  used  to  repi'esent  letters,  and  in  this  system  is  written 
in  three  different  directions,  viz:  horizontal,  right  oblique, 
and  left  oblique.     No  vertical  strokes  are  used. 

HORIZOXTAL.        PwIGHT    OBLIQUE.     LEFT    OBLIQUE. 


It  is  also  written  both  short  and  lonsr  in  each  direction. 


CUKVES. 

Curves  are  used   to  express  letters,  and   like  lines  are 
drawn  in  three  different  directions. 


HORIZONTALS. 


RIGHT    OBLIQUES. 


LEFT    OBLIQUES. 


They  are  not  only  drawn  in  opposite  curves  in  the 
different  directions,  as  above,  but,  like  lines,  are  also  drawn 
both   short  and  loner. 


These  curves  are  the  arcs  of  flattened  ellipses,  such  as 
the  hand  naturally  makes  in  a  rapid  effort  to  produce  con- 
tinued motion. 


ELLIPSES. 


/^ 


These  outlines  should  be  frequently  and  rapidly  prac- 
ticed, in  continuous  line  as  movement  exercises,  to  acquire 


20 


ECLECTIC    SHORT-HAND. 


freedom  of  stroke;  writing  each  in  opposite  directions,  as 
indicated  by  the  arrows. 

The  lines  used  for  letters  are  axes  of  the  above  ellipses. 

.^^  j^^  ^  ^^     "^ 

The  following  combinations  may  also  be  rapidly  prac- 
ticed with  great  advantage,  the  pupil  striving  to  acquire 
exactness  of  stroke  with  fi-eedom  and  quickness  of  execu- 
tion. 

MOVEMENT    EXERCISES. 


ECLECTIC    ALPHABET. 
LESSON  11. 

SilALL   LETTEKS. 


21 


a         1)           r            d         e  f          g          h 

To         I         m          n         o  p          2          r 

■^    ^ ^  ^  /  < 

w             V         w  X           y          z 


^ 


ch    '    sk        leh    ch    »h     th         ng 
^         J>         a^         O       .^^     —^ 

VOWELS  ■ 

a  e  i  0  u 


y  J 

H  t 


CAPITALS  . 

A        B         C       Cn       D        E        F  G        H  T 

J       K        L         M       N        0          P  Q^        It  8 

^   y^    ^      . —     ^^  /—  ^ 

SH       T       TJI      U         V         W       WH  X         Y  Z 


22  ECLECTIC    SHORT-HAND. 

Let  the  pupil  now  thoroughly  learn  the  alphabet,  be- 
ginning with  the  vowels,  and  taking  up  each  class  in  its 
order.  An  effective  method  of  learning  it  is  that  of  re- 
peatedly writing  and  pronouncing  each  letter. 

Direction  of  movement. — The  vowels  e  and  u  are 
always  written  downward,  while  a,  i  and  o  are  written  either 
downward  or  upward,  and  are  hence  called  reversible 
letters.  The  consonants  fc,  q,  x  and  z  are  downward 
strokes,  while  c,  v,  to  and  j  are  reversible  letters.  The  j, 
when  reversed,  has  the  circle  at  the  bottom. 

The  horizontal  letters  are  drawn  to  the  right.  The 
straight  t  is  drawn  downward,  and  the  straight  s  upward. 

The  letters  A,  I,  g  and  p,  when  final,  are  generally 
turned  back  on  the  letter  to  which  they  are  united,  the 
two  letters  fonning  a  continuous  line. 

The  letters  c  and  k  are  made  alike;  the  purpose  being 
to  dispense  with  the  use  of  l\     (See  p.  33.) 

Slope  of  reversible  strokes. — If  the  pupil  writes  a 
repeatedly  upward  and  then  downwai'd,  giving  the  hand  a 
free  motion,  he  will  discover  that  he  naturally  slopes  the 
upward  strokes  more  than  the  downward;  also  making 
them  longer  than  the  downward  strokes. 

This  is  the  law  of  movement  in  long-hand  writing,  by 
which  the  hand  of  the  writer,  being  carried  farther  in  the' 
upward  movement  than  it  returns  to  the  left  in  the  down- 
ward movement,  advances  to  the  right  across  the  page. 
The  pupil  will  see  in  <,'yz  a  clear  illustration  of  this  law  of 
movement  in  long-hand,  which  in  this  system  applies  to  all 
the  oblique  strokes. 

Let  the  pupil  practice  the  reversible  letters  in  opposite 
directions. 


REVERSIBLE    LETTERS.  23 

DOWNWARD.  UPWARD. 

/  y  /  ^  /  y 

COMBINATIONS. 

This  law  of  movement,  adopted  from  long-hand,  is 
peculiar  to  this  system  of  short-hand,  and  is  of  great  im- 
portance, employing  motions  similar  to  those  which  the 
hand  has  acquired  by  practice  in  long-hand,  thus  making 
its  execution  much  easier  and  more  certain  than  the  move- 
ment of  those  systems  containing  vertical  lines  and  curves, 
which  in  combination  with  oblique  and  horizontal  strokes 
require  an  irregular  movement,  very  unlike  that  of  long- 
hand. In  long-hand  we  have  upward,  downward  and  hori- 
zontal lines,  recurring  in  regular  order,  the  upward  strokes 
always  followed  by  a  downward  stroke,  as  in  Z,  m,  etc.,  or 
by  a  horizontal  stroke,  as  in  o,  v,  6,  etc.,  while  the  down- 
ward lines  are  always  followed  by  an  upward  stroke.  In 
the  short-hand  we  have  upward,  downward  and  horizontal 
strokes.  The  downward  strokes  are  of  two  classes;  the 
left  obliques  corresponding  in  form  and  slope  with  the 
strokes  of  back-hand,  while  the  right  obliques  slope  like 
downward  strokes  of  the  common  slope.  As  in  long-hand, 
an  upward  stroke  is  generally  followed  by  a  downward  or 
a  horizontal  sti-oke,  while  a  downward  stroke  is  followed 
by  an  upward  or  horizontal  sti'oke. 

Relative  Lengths,  as  in  long-hand,  letters  are  divided 
into  extended  and  contracted  letters.  So  in  this  short- 
hand we  have  long  and  short  letters,  a  natural  and  simple 
distinction. 


24  ECLECTIC    SHORT-HAND. 

Care  must  be  taken  to  preserve  the  relative  lengths  of 
the  letters.  The  exact  length  of  either  class  is  of  little 
importance,  so  long  as  the  relative  length  is  preserved. 
One  will  naturally  write  a  fine,  another  a  coarse  hand, 
with  equal  propriety,  while  each  preserves  the  relative 
proportions  of  the  letters. 

It  is  possible  to  write  so  fine  as  to  lose  the  individu- 
ality of  the  letters,  hence  it  will  be  well  for  the  pupil 
to  adopt  the  sizes  given  in  the  exercises  until  by  experi- 
ence he  determines  the  sizes  natural  to  his  hand. 

SHORT  LETTERS. 
LONG  LETTERS. 


DirecLion. — The  distinction  of  direction  is  important, 
and  great  care  must  be  exercised  by  the  pupil,  in  all  prac- 
tice, to  preserve  this  feature  of  the  alphabet. 

Every  stroke  must  be  either  right  oblique,  left  oblique, 
or  horizontal. 

Lines  must  always  be  made  straight,  to  make  an  ob- 
vious distinction  between  them  and  the  curves. 

Curves. — Tlie  degree  of  curvature  should  be  slight, 
flattened  curves  being  much  more  facile  than  intense 
curves. 

Bapidittj. — Having  thoroughly  learned  the  alphabet, 
let  the  pupil  begin  at  once  to  form  the  habit  of  quick 
movement,  by  making  each  letter  as  quickly  as  possible  ; 
seeking  to  combine  quickness  of  movement  and  exactness 
of  form. 


COMBINING   LETTERS.  25 

Classification, — The  following  arrangement  of  the  let- 
ters clearly  presents  their  several  features,  viz,  direction, 
length,  and  forna. 

HORIZONTALS.       RIGHT    OBLIQUES.       LEFT    OBLIQUES. 


Vowels. — The  use  of  strokes  instead  of  minute  dashes, 
semi-circles,  angles  or  dots,  as  in  former  systems,  gives  to 
the  vowels  a  writing  power  equal  in  all  respects  to  conso- 
nants ;  adding  both  to  the  legible  and  cursive  character  of 
the  writing.  Their  representation  by  strokes  of  uniform 
length  not  only  preserves  their  symmetry  as  a  class,  but 
gives  them  a  uniform  writing  value. 

Semi-vowels, — The  to  and  y,  of  equal  values,  are  ex- 
pressed by  similar  strokes,  while  r,  /*  and  I,  which  form, 
with  the  consonants,  coalescents  and  digraphs,  are  repre- 
sented by  charactei's  which  combine  with  consonants  with 
the  utmost  facility. 

Consonants. — In  the  selection  of  particular  strokes  to 
represent  particular  consonants,  as  well  indeed  as  vowels 
and  semi-vowels,  the  more  facile  strokes  are  employed  to 
express  the  letters  of  most  frequent  occurrence,  and  most 
liable  to  difficult  combinations. 

Capitals. — Although  not  of  great  importance  to  the 
reportorial  art  in  general,  there  are  cases  in  which  capitals 
are  valuable,  as  in  abbreviations  and  proper  names.  The 
distinguishing  feature  of  capital  letters  is  so  simple  and 
uniform  as  to  render  their  use  quite  possible,  even  in  the 
swiftest  writing. 

Suggestion. — Let  the  pupil  not  pass  to  the  following 
lesson  until  he  can  make  the  alphabet  with   some  degree 


26  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

of  perfection  at  the  rate  of  two  to  three  times  a  minute, 
which  he  should  daily  strive  to  accelerate. 

LESSON  III. 

COMBINING    LETTERS. 

In  combination,  one  letter  follows  after  another  in  the 
most  natural  and  easy  manner.  The  following  rules  should 
be  well  considered. 

Mule  I. — Horizontals  are  always  drawn  from  left  to 
right.  The  letters  I,  h,  p  and  g  form  an  exception  to  this 
rule  when  they  follow  and  are  connected  with  horizontal 
lettei's,  being  drawn  in  a  direction  opposite  from  the  hori- 
zontal. 

Rule  II. — Right  obliques  are  drawn  to  the  right  or 
left  ;  the  writer  seeking  in  any  case  to  secure  the  simplest, 
clearest,  and  most  horizontal  word  outline. 

a. — The  right  oblique  beginning  a  word  should  gener- 
ally be  made  upward,  unless  the  preceding  word  finished 
with  an  upward  stroke,  making  a  downward  stroke  at  the 
beginning  of  the  following  word  more  natural. 

b. — When  a  right  oblique  follows  another,  they  should 
generally  be  made  in  opposite  directions;  that  is,  the  first 
being  upward,  the  second  should  be  downward;  or  if  the 
first  is  downward,  the  second  should  be  upward. 

e. — If  the  first  right  oblique  happen  to  be  below  the 
line  of  writing,  then  one  following  it  may  be  carried  up- 
ward. 

Rule  III. — Left  obliques  are  generally  drawn  to  the 
right.  But  in  case  of  one  following  another,  if  the  word 
is  likely  to  encvoach  on  the  line  below,  the  second  letter 
may  be  drawn  uitwavd  to  the  left. 


ILLUSTRATIVE   COMBINATIONS. 


27 


READING    AND    WRITING    EXERCISE.  Key,  p.  35. 


-7 


-T 


-P   -7^ 


/- 


Zl 


^  z^  ^ 


9^. 


/ ^_^    ^ — -   ^^   ^^  ^^ 


v^    /  ^  0/  ~~a  ---6 


/. 


9 7 


// 


28 


y 


ECLECTIC    SHOKT-HAND. 


LESSON  IV. 


HOOKS,    LOOP,    AND    CIRCLE. 

These  are  valuable  forms  for  letters,  because  of  their 
individuality,  and  because  they  may  generally  unite  with 
other  letters  in  a  continuous  stroke. 

Hooks, — The  hook  is  a  slight  turn,  such  as  is  seen  in 
uniting  the  lines  of  -^^^  in  long-hand  ;  the  upper  turns 
being  used  for  p  and  the  lower  last  turn  for  g.  Beginning 
a  word,  they  are  generally  united  with  the  following  letter 
by  an  angle;  but  in  the  midst  of  a  word,  or  when  final,  the 
j)  is  generally  turned  on  the  upper  side  and  g  on  the  lower 
side  of  any  letter. 

ILLUSTRATIONS.  ,  .   K6y,  pl85. 


^.    ^ 


The  circle  for  h  is  angularly  joined,  except  for  hp,  ch, 
dh,  th,  sh,  wli,  and  zh.    When  used  for  r  it  is  turned  on  the 

character  to  which  it  is  attached  as  a  continuation  of  it. 


ILLUSTRATIONS. 


Key,  p.  35. 


APPLICATION   OF   SHADING. 


29 


The  loop  is  used  to  express  /,  which  connects  with 
other  letters  in  a  manner  similar  to  /*,  in  a  continuous 
stroke.  Careful  study  of  the  following  illustrations  will 
enable  the  pupil  to  comprehend  all  the  different  cases  of 
combination. 


^ss  -^^  ^  ^y"  "^"^  <i^  <e^ 


DOUBLE    LETTERS. 

Letters  are  doubled  onl\'  when  necessary  to  distinct  pro- 
nunciation. A  letter  is  doubled  by  writing  one  after  the 
other,  as  in  long-hand.  Double  m  is  expressed  by  a  long 
line  which  is  also  used  for  mn.  Double  n  and  nm  are 
separated  by  a  slight  upward  movement. 


ILLUSTRATIONS. 


Key,  p.  35. 


/!^  ^/   — ^    ^-?1»     <'tx 


LESSON  V. 

SHADING    FOR    R. 

The  letter  r  is  made  a  heavy  line,  and  the  onhj  heavy 
line  in  the  alphabet,  that  we  may  use  shading  to  express  r. 
In  speech  r  and  the  preceding  or  following  letter  generally 
so  nearly  coalesce  as  to  be  uttered  by  one  impulse  of  the 
voice,  which  renders  it  very  desirable  to  write  them  by  one 


30  ECLECTIC   SHOKT-HAN-t). 

stroke.  Hence  any  letter  is  shaded  to  express  r.  Begin- 
ning a  letter  with  the  shade  writes  r  before  it,  and  ending 
it  with  the  shade  writes  r  after  it.  This  is  regarded  not 
only  as  a  beautiful  but  as  an  invaluable  contraction,  giving 
a  value  to  thickened  strokes  not  found  in  other  systems. 
The  letter  r  comprises  from  five  to  ten  per  cent,  of  the 
written  page,  and  being  thus  expressed  without  increasing 
the  number  of  strokes,  is  a  very  considerable  economy  in 
the  art. 

The  pupil  will  observe  that  the  alphabetic  form  of  r 
is  seldom  used  except  as  an  initial,  as  in  writing  proper 
names,  etc. 

If  to  the  unskillful  hand  shading  should  seem  at  first  to 
be  difficult,  persevering  practice  will  soon  render  it  both 
possible  and  easy.  A  flexible  pen  is  quite  necessary  to 
facile  and  definite  shading. 

The  following  illustrations  will  give  a  clear  idea  of  the 
application  of  shading.  The  pupil  will  remember  to  read 
r  before  those  letters  beginning  with  the  shade,  and  after 
those  ending  with  it. 

The  //  is  shaded  on  either  side,  whichever  is  most  con- 
venient, always  to  place  r  after  it,  h  being  always  silent 
when  r  precedes  it,  as  in  the  word  catarrh,  which  is  written 
cafar. 

Let  the  pupil  repeatedly  read  and  write  the  illustrations. 


DIPHTHONGS   AND   DIGRAPHS. 


31 


ILLUSTHATIONS. 


Key,  p.  35. 


^^ 


S^ 


LESSON  VI. 

SPECIAL    PHONIC    PROVISIONS. 

The  (liphthongs  an  aw,  on  ow,  oi  oij,  oo,  may  be  written 
in  the  use  of  the  letters  composing  them,  but  for  brevity, 
and  because  they  represent  a  union  of  two  sounds  in  one,  a 
single  stroke  for  each  is  desirable  ;  hence  a  is  uniformly 
shaded  to  express  au,  atv;  u  is  uniformly  shaded  to  repre  • 
xent  on,  ow;  i  is  uniformly  shaded  to  represent  oi,  oy;  and 
0  to  express  oo. 

an  aw,      ou  ow,       eu  ew,    oi  oy,        oo. 

/"       ^       V     y      y 

When  one  or  more  vowels  follow  another  in  the  same 
syllable,  one  or  two  only  being  sounded,  both  or  all  repre- 
senting a  single  elementary  sound,  let  the  silent  one  be 
omitted,  writing  the  one  whose  sound  is  pronounced  or  the 
vowel  which  expresses  the  sound.  /- 

The  following  cases  will  fully  illustrate  the  principle: 


aa 
ao 


Canaan 
gaol 


canan 


jal 


32  ECLECTIC   SHOET-HAKD. 

ay 

ea 
ee 
ei 
eo 
eu 
ew 

ey 

ie 

oa 
oe 
ua 
ue 
ui 

uy 

aye 

awe 

eau 

eau 

eou 

eye 

ieu 

iou 

iew 

TJie  Digraphs  ch,  sh,  th,  wh,  zh,  gh,  ph,  and  ng,  are 
clearly  expressed  by  the  characters  producing  them.  For 
brevity,  however,  ch.  .^Ji,  when  initial,  and  irh  are  begun 
with  a  tick,  and  cJi  and  sh  final  are  expressed  by  enlarged  h. 
Ph  and  gh,  when  not  silent,  are  expressed  by  /.  Ng  hard 
is  written  with  a  hook,  but  when  g  is  soft  it  is  united 
an<4ularlv. 


may 

ma 

meat 

met 

need 

ned 

ceiling 

seling 

people 

pepl 

feud 

fud 

new 

nu 

they 

tha 

belief 

belef 

coat 

cot 

foe 

fo 

guard 

gard 

sue 

su 

guise 

gis 

buy 

by 

ay 

aw 

beau 

bo 

beauty 

buty 

gorgeous 

gorjus 

I  or  i 

lieu 

lu 

religious 

relijus 

view 

vu 

PHONIC    PROVISIOKS.  33 

c,  h. — The  Spelling  Reform  Association  having  pi'oposed 
to  restore  c  to  its  original  value,  giving  it  uniformly  the 
sound  of  h,  and  to  dispense  with  the  letter  ^•,  we  have 
adopted  the  suggestion  as  especially  valuable  to  the  art  of 
short-hand,  and  utilize  it  by  representing  c  and  k  by  the 
same  stroke.  The  pupil  will  represent  the  k  sound  by  c, 
whether  it  is  represented  by  c,  ck,  ch,  or  k:  thus,  back,  hoc; 
thick,  thic  ;  thank,  thane  ;  sick,  sic  ;  wink,  wine  ;  chrome, 
croin  ;  Christ,  Crist.  Tlie  silent  k,  as  in  knack,  knife,  is 
always  omitted,  hence  nac,  nif. 

The  soft  c,  as  in  since,  once,  commence,  is  always  ex- 
pressed by  s,  hence,  sins,  ons,  or  wons,  comens. 

The  g  and  j. — Let  g  be  used  to  express  the  sound  it 
has  in  all  genuine  Anglo-Saxon  words,  such  as  ^et,  ^'ive, 
bi^^er  (bigr),  ayain  (agn).  Whenever  it  has  the  sound  of 
j,  let  j  be  used,  as  in  siege,  sej;  bridge,  hrij;  edge,  ej. 

The  s  and  z  are  interchangeable  letters,  and  may  be 
used  as  in  the  common  orthography,  or  the  pupil  may  use 
s  only  where  the  sound  is  that  of  s,  as  in  say,  seem,  just, 
worse,  using  z  for  the  sound  in  trees,  nose,  zero,  etc. 

The  letter  q,  with  the  u  which  always  follows  it,  is  but 
a  digraph  for  kw;  and  as  it  is  better  for  short-hand  pur- 
poses than  it  would  be  to  write  kw,  it  is  valuable  in  the 
alphabet.  Besides,  it  is  always  followed  by  u,  hence  the  u 
after  q  is  always  omitted,  being  understood  ;  as  in  quince, 
qins;  quart,  qart.  When  q  begins  a  word  let  it  always  be 
struck  downward,  while  c  beginning  a  word  is  always 
drawn  upward  ;  but  in  the  midst  or  at  the  end  of  a 
word  let  either  of  these  letters  be  drawn  upward  or 
downward,  whichever  will  preserve  the  most  compact  and 


34  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

easily  written  word  form,  relying  on  the  context  in  reading 
to  determine  whether  c  or  qu  is  intended  by  the  writer. 

The  letter  ac  is  a  digraph  for  ks,  and  being  shorter, 
while  equally  legible,  is  preferable  for  short-hand  use. 

From  words  which  begin  with  ex  the  e  may  be  omitted, 
writing  xampl,  xert,  xcus. 

WRITING    EXERCISES. 

Da  de  di  do  du,  sa  se  si  so  su,  ta  te  ti  ro  tu,  fa  fe  fi  fo 
fu,  ma  me  mi  mo  mu,  na  ne  ni  no  nu,  ca  ce  ci  co  cu,  wa  we 
wi  wo,  va  ve  vi  vo  vu,  ba  be  bi  bo  bu,  ga  ge  gi  go  gu,  ha 
he  hi  ho  hu,  ja  je  ji  jo  ju,  la  le  li  lo  lu,  pa  pe  pi  po  pu, 
qa  qe  qi  qo,  ra  re  ri  ro  ru,  xa  xe  xi  xo  xu,  ya  ye  yo  yi  yu, 
za  ze  zi  zo  zu,  ab  ac  ad  af  ay  ah  aj  al  am  an  ap  aq  ar  as  at 
av  aw  ay  az,  eb  ec  ed  ef  eg  eh  ej  el  em  en  ep  eq  er  es  et  ev 
ew  ex  ey  ez,  ib  ic  id  ig  ij  il  im  in  ip  iq  ir  is  it  iv  iw  ix  iz, 
ob  00  od  of  og  oh  oj  ol  om  on  op  oq  or  os  ot  ov  ow  ox  ow  oy 
oz,  ub  uc  nd  uf  ug  uh  uj  ul  um  un  up  us  ut  uv  uy  uz,  bab 
bac  bad  baf  bag  hah  baj  bal  bam  ban  bap  baq  bar  bas  bat 
bav  baw  bax  bay  baz,  cab  cac  cad  caf  cag  caj  cal  cam  can 
cap  car  cas  cat  cav  caw  cax  cay  caz,  dab  dac  dad  daf  dag 
daj  dal  dam  dan  dap  dar  das  dat  dav  daw  day  daz,  fab  fac 
fad  faf  fag  faj  fal  fam  fan  fap  far  fas  fat  fav  faw  fax  fay 
faz,  gab  gac  gad  gaf  gag  gaj  gal  gam  gan  gap  gar  gas  gat 
gav  gaw  gax  gay  gaz,  bab  bac  had  hag  haj  hal  ham  han 
hap  har  has  hat  bav  haw  hay  haz,  jab  jac  jad  jaf  jah  jal 
jam  jan  jap  jar  jas  jat  jav  jaw  jaz,  lab  lac  lad  laf  lag  lah 
laj  lam  Ian  lap  lar  las  lat  lav  law  lax  laz,  mab  mac  mad 
maf  mag  mah  maj  mal  mam  man  map  mar  mas  mat  mav 
maw  max  maz,  nab  nac  nad  naf  nag  naj  nal  nam  nan  nap 
nar  nas  nat  nav  n;i\v  nax  naz,  pab  pac  pad  paf  pag  paj   pal 


tHONlC  PROVISIOIfS.  35 

patn  pan  pap  par  pas  pat  pav  paw  pax  paz,  qab  qac  qad  qaf 
qag  qah  qaj  qal  qam  qan  qar  qas  qat  qav  qaz,  rab  rac  rad 
raf  rag  rah  raj  ral  ram  ran  rap  raq  rar  ras  rat  rav  raw  rax 
raz,  sab  sac  sad  saf  sag  saj  sal  sam  san  sap  saq  sar  sas  sat 
sav  saw  sax  saz,  tab  tac  tad  taf  tag  tab  taj  tal  tarn  tan  tap 
taq  tar  tas  tat  tav  taw  tax  taz,  vab  vac  vad  vaf  vag  vah  vaj 
val  vam  van  vap  vaq  var  vas  vat  vav  vaw  vax  vaz,  wab  wac 
wad  waf  wag  wah  waj  wal  warn  wan  wap  war  was  wat  wav 
wax  waz,  xab  xac  xad  xaf  xag  xaj  xal  xam  xan  xap  xar  xas 
xat  xav  xaw  xaz,  yab  yac  yad  yaf  yag  yah  yaj  yal  yam  yan 
yap  yar  yas  yat  yav  yaw  yax  yaz,  zab  zac  zad  zaf  zag  zah  zaj 
zal  zam  zan  zap  zaq  zar  zas  zat  zav  zaw  zax  zay  zaz. 

KEY   TO   EXERCISES  0\   PRECEDING   PAGES. 

Page  27. — Ms  sm  fe  dd  thth  thd  sd^sthms  dnth  thf  eo  wo  ca  va 
wa  ci  wi  vo  cow  cov  cav  caw  wav  wif 'with  win  won  wov  wan  van 
vat  vin  vow  vot  was  vacat  vows  void  vahi  vale  mi  ma  ma  me  mi 
moons  noon  boon  coon  soon  thooc  doom  sa  se  so  si  sii  fa  fi  fo  fe  fu 
ba  ui  ou  ou  an  in  in  on  on  an  an  is  if  ith  id  il  il  is  id  of  od  ow  ov  ol 
oth  og  op  ath  an  as  ad  al  ar  es  eu  eth  ed  eg  el  ef  en  em  uc  uth  un  uf 
ug  up  ul  thr  dr  er  or  ar  ir  ur  br  nr  ta  ti  to  tu  te  tn  tm  ts  tc  tb  tj 
tf  tg  tp  tr  tt  tth  tv  ty  tx  tch  tsh  bt  ct  dt  ft  ht  mt  nt  qut  rt  st  vt  wt 
yt  xt  tht  sht  cht  wht  bs  cs  ds  es  fs  gs  hs  is  js  js  Is  ms  ns  os  os  ps  ps 
qus  rs  rt  ts  ths  st  us  vs. 

Page  28. —  Pa  pa  pe  pe  pi  pi  po  po  pu  pg  ap  ap  op  op  ep  up  up 
pth  pd  pn  sp  dp  npth  xp  ip  ip  ag  ag  og  og  ig  ig  ug  eg  xig  eg  sg  fg 
thg  dg  dg  wg  vg  eg  yg. 

Hd  hn  hth  hth  ht  hg  hs  hv  hf  he  rd  rn  rth  rt  rg  rv  rf  re  dr  sr 
nr  vr  cr  wr  yr  pr  gr  tr  br  shn  ehn  whn  shd  chd  whd  shth  chf  whthr. 

Page  29.— ^\  fl  dl  thl  ral  nl  cl  wl  vl  al  bl  xl  aid  old  eld  els  elm 
lis  old  ladl  le  ly  yl  fix  sly  nly  yls  uly  pla  plo  pli  plm  phi  pie  gla  glo 
gli  gle  glu  gli  gld 

Mm  mn,  nn  nm,  thth  dd  ss  ff  ee  cc  aa  oo  oo  ii  pp  gg 

Page  31. — Ar  or  ir  ur  er  ra  ro  ri  ru  re  br  thr  dr  pr  gr  nr  er  vr  wr 
yr  xr  zr  fr  sr  mr  frmr  drsr  thrthr  thrmr  frs  prtr  prfr  prmr  frthr 
mrmrs  ordr  ritr  rip  riv  rim  rigr  far  for  fir  fer  furthr  thratr  thremr 
thrirar  thru  thre  thri  thra  thro  dra  dri  dro  dre  portr  warfr  britr. 


CHAPTER  II. 


ABBREVIATED  SPELLING. 

The  first  fundamental  principle  of  short-hand  is  a  sim- 
plified alphabet.  The  second  fundamental  is  the  disuse  of  all 
letters  that  may  be  dispensed  with,  writing  words  in  the 
simplest  manner,  as  tho  for  though,  thru  for  through,  enuf 
for  enough,  etc. 

The  alphabet,  as  it  has  been  presented,  is  perfectly 
adapted  to  writing  the  language  fully,  according  to  the 
common  orthography;  but  since  the  object  of  the  art  is 
brevity  and  rapidity,  the  thoughtful  student  will  appre- 
ciate the  importance  of  abbreviated  or  phonic  spelling. 

The  following  rules  adopted  by  the  Spelling  Reform 
Association,  and  employed  in  the  Chicago  "Tribune"  and 
the  "  Home  .Journal,"  embody  the  latest  orthographic  re- 
search, and  are  hence  important  to  the  student  of  short- 
hand, as  a  foundation  for  that  full  orthographic  abbrevia- 
tion necessary  to  verbatim  reporting. 

SPELLING  EEFOIOr  ASSOCIATION'S  RULES. 

I. — FINAL    SILKNT    E. 

1.  With  short  preceding  vowel,  (a)  In  long  words: 
practicabl,  accessibi,  imbecil,  periwinkl,  medicin,  treatis, 
reeompens,  hypocvit,  infinit,  indicativ.  Many  hundreds  of 
words   belong  to  this    class,   in   gveat   part   learned  terms 


ABBEEVIATED    SPELLING.  37 

from  Greek  or  Latin,  and  common  to  many  languages. 
To  scholars  they  look  more  natural  and  scholarly,  as  most 
languages  write  them  without  the  final  e.  (b)  In  short 
words:  hav,  liv,  giv,  sav,  lov. 

2.  With  long  vowel  preceding,  (a)  The  long  sound 
represented  by  two  letters  in  the  old  spelling:  frontispiec, 
peac,  voic,  releas,  believ,  perceiv,  prais,  pois,  etc.  (6)  The 
long  sound  represented  by  a  single  letter  in  old  spelling: 
imbib,  glob,  populac,  suffic,  undertak,  provok,  confiscat,  con- 
stitut,  persecut,  and  hundreds  more. 

It  will  be  seen  that  there  are  degrees  of  difficulty  in 
parting  with  silent  e;  but  on  the  whole  it  is  simplest  never 
to  write  it.     Everybody  can  understand  that. 

Drop  it  also  in  plurals  and  other  inflections:  infinitivs, 
representativs,  givs,  livd,  compeld,  etc. 

II. T    FOR   ED. 

Another  easy  change  common  in  old  English,  and  again 
becoming  so,  is  to  write  t  for  ed,  when  it  is  so  pronounced: 
kist,  worshipt,  lasht,  imprest,  approacht,  etc. 

III. OTHER    LETTERS. 

For  further  suggestions  we  add  the  following  from  a 
report  made  to  the  Philadelphia  meeting: 

1.  Omit  final  ue  in  catalog,  colleag,  harang,  etc. 

2.  Omit  a  from  the  digraph  ea  when  pronounced  as  e- 
short:  hed,  heven,  helth,  welth,  zelous,  etc. 

3.  Omit  (/h  when  silent,  and  supply  its  place  with  / 
when  pronounced  as/;  dauter,  slauter,  bout,  tho,  altho,  enuf, 
ruf,  etc. 

4.  Write  /  for  ph  in  alfabet,  fantom,  camfor,  filosofy,  etc. 


38  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

5.  Write  k  or  c  for  ch  in  all  words  in  which  ch  is  pro- 
nounced as  k  :  arcitect,  nionarc,  cemistry,  caracter,  etc. 

6.  Omit  h,  c,  d,  /,  g,  h,  k,  I,  w,  n,  o,  p,  r,  s,  t,  w,  z,  ch,  rh 
and  th  when  silent,  as  in  the  following  examples: 

b  in  eb,  det,  lam,  lim,  etc. 

c  in  abses,  absind,  acquies,  coales,  eflferves,  sent  (scent), 
septer,  simitar,  sion  (scion),  vitls,  etc. 

d  in  Wensday,  ad,  ed,  etc. 

/  in  buf,  bluf,  clif,  muf,  scof,  stif,  etc. 

(/  in  apothem,  arrain,  campain,  narl,  nash,  naw,  eg,  etc. 

h  in  gost,  agast,  gastly,  rim,  rubarb,  retoric,  burg,  etc.; 
onest,  onor,  our,  etc. 

k  in  nee,  nead,  neel,  nif,  noc  (knock),  etc. 

/  in  bam  (balm),  cam,  pam,  sam  (psalm),  shal,  wel,  etc. 

w  in  nemonic,  etc. 

n  in  autumn,  condem,  dam,  solem,  hym  (hymn),  etc. 

})  in  numatic,  numonia,  sam  (psalm),  sudonym,  etc. 

r  in  bur,  er,  pur,  etc. 

s  in  appropo,  il  (isle),  iland,  il  (aisle),  vicount,  etc.;  bras, 
gas  (guess),  fulnes,  etc. 

t  in  brunet,  depo,  glisen,  lisen,  ofen,  morgag,  bach 
(batch),  lacb,  etc. 

?r  in  hoop  (whoop),  sord. 

z  in  buz,  fuz,  etc. 

I'll  in  dram  (drachm),  sism,  sismatic. 

pji  and  (])  in  tisic  (phthisic),  ismus,  etc. 

rh  in  catar  (catarrh),  etc. 

7.  Omit  a,  e.  i,  o  and  u  when  silent,  as  in  the  words  siv 
(sieve),  forfit.  counterfit.  mullin,  surfit,  etc.:  adiu,  purliu, 
frend,  plad;  lepard;  bild.  gard.  garante,  ges,  gitar,  biscit, 
condit,  circit,  dant,  lanch,  stanch,  etc. 


ABBREVIATED   SPELLING.  39 

8.    And  change  eau  to  o  in  bo  (beau),  buro,  etc. 

RULES    BY    HON.    JOSEPH    MEDILL, 

And  adopted  in  the  "  Chicago  Daily  Tribune  "  September  2, 
1879: 

Omit  tie  in  demagog,  catalog,  pedagog,  synagog,  dialog, 
and  other  words  ending  in  logue  and  gogue. 

Omit  the  superfluous  we  in  program,  gram. 

Omit  the  second  m  in  dilemma  (dilema.) 

Omit  the  superfluous  te  in  cigaret,  etiquet,  parquet, 
coquet,  and  all  similar  words,  except  Gazette  when  it  is 
used  as  the  name  of  a  newspaper. 

Spell  definit  in  all  its  forms  without  the  final  e;  thus: 
definit-ly-ness,  indefinit-ly-ness. 

Spell   infinit  without   the  final  e;    also,  infinit-ly-ness. 

Omit  final  e  in  hypocrit,  favorit;  also,  opposit-ly-ness 
and  apposit-ly-ness. 

In  words  ending  in  "  lessness  "  drop  one  s  from  "  less," 
viz,  carelesness,  thanklesness,  etc. 

Omit  the  fourth  s  in  assassin  (assasin)  and  other  forms 
of  the  word. 

Spell  somerset,  not  somersault. 

Spell  canon  with  a  Spanish  n,  or  spell  it  canyon. 

Change  j?/i  to /in  fantom,  fantasm,  and  all  forms  of  the 
word;  also  in  fonetic-s-al.  fonografy,  orthografy,  alfabet, 
digraf,  difthong. 

ABBREVIATION. 

These  rules  for  spelling  are  intended  to  provide  for  the 
phonic  writing  of  words,  as  being  the  shortest  and  sim- 
plest.    They  show   the    progress  of   the  day  in   regard  to 


40  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

our  orthography,  which,  if  adopted,  will  render  easy  many  a 
vexatious  word.  But  while  the  jDhonic  writing  thus  pro- 
vided is  the  best  possible  foundation  for  stenography,  still,  a 
high  degree  of  proficiency  in  the  art  requires  in  most  words 
a  briefer  writing  than  even  this.  Some  short  words  may 
be  clearly  indicated  by  the  consonants  which  they  comprise, 
as  en  for  can,  cm  for  come,  sm  for  some  or  seem  or  same, 
thn  for  then  or  than,  thm  for  them,  bt  for  but,  nt  for  not. 
nd  for  and,  th  for  the.  Some  long  words  may  be  deprived 
of  several  lettei's  and  still  be  clearly  suggested,  as  common, 
comn;  summon,  suran;  though,  tho;  through,  thru;  enough, 
enuf,  or  nuf ;  thorough,  thuro.  Words  containing  two 
vowels  may  be  written  with  one  of  them,  as  ech  for  each, 
nethr  for  neither,  hot  for  bought,  rad  for  raid,  etc.  All 
silent  letters  should  be  omitted,  and  when  two  letters  or  a 
syllable  can  be  expressed  by  a  single  letter  it  should  be 
done. 

Let  the  pupil  write  the  following  words  in  long-hand 
with  the  fewest  possible  letters,  and  he  will  thus  acquire  an 
imoortant  feature  of  stenography: 

ABBREVIATING    EXERCISE. 

Ail,  aid,  aim.  air,  say,  may,  ba}^  gay,  hay,  they,  obey, 
inveigh,  dray,  gray,  slay,  feint,  neigh,  said,  each,  teach, 
preach,  peach,  either,  neither,  feel,  seal,  keel,  peel,  kneel, 
belief,  relief,  high,  sleigh,  weigh,  convenient  (convnynt), 
onion,  rebellious,  bean,  thought,  through,  thorough,  pour, 
sow,  mow,  plough,  tough,  cough,  enough,  trough,  slough, 
high,  nigh,  night,  right,  tight,  light,  fight,  few,  new,  dew, 
neuter,  fruit.  piou>,  view,  tongue,  believe,  beckon,  become, 
righteous,  redeem,        indicate,       random,        indulge,      laugh, 


ABBREVIATED   SPELLING.  41 

again,  voyage,  endless,  common,  woman,  niurmui",  perform, 
prefer,  complain,  continue,  season,  great,  fondness,  non- 
sense, seasons,  phthisic,  phial,  phlegm  (flem),  ocean,  evasion, 
mention,  elysian. 

Pronunciation. — The  following  list  consists  of  conso- 
nant outlines  of  short  and  common  words,  intended  for  the 
pupil  to  pronounce,  for  the  purpose  of  still  further  develop- 
ing the  idea  of  brevity.  They  are  not  presented  as  the 
briefest  writing  of  the  words,  but  merely  as  an  exercise  in 
approximate  brevity. 

If  the  pupil  finds  difficulty  in  determining  a  word  let 
him  pronounce  the  consonants  with  a  vowel  between  them 
until  he  has  developed  a  word. 

PRONOUNCING    EXERCISE. 

b  bd  bt  bn  br  bfr  brf  bl  bbl  bcm  bcs  bnt  bnd  bnth  bsd 
bsds  bsts  btwn  bhf  bhv,  cd  en  cm  ct  cr  cmns  cmng  cs  chs 
chrmn  chrm  chf  cht  clip  chid  eld  elm  clr  clrk,  dd  da  dn  dr 
dl  dly  drd  ds  dm  drp  drk  drm  drs  drv,  fd  fgr  fcl  fm  fn  frm 
fr  frst  frs  frthr  fl  ffl,  gd  gt  gn  grt  grtr  gld  gltr  grl  glm  grm 
grn  gs,  hd  hf  hm  hnd  hp  hr  hs  ht  hv,  jg  jgs  jm  jn  jr  jst 
jgrant,  Id  Ik  If  1ft  Im  Ind  Imnt  Is  1st  Iv  Ix,  md  mc  mb  ml 
mn  mr  ms  mv  mx  mny  mrmr,  nd  nt  nl  nm  nn  nr  ns  nv  nxt, 
pd  prf  prt  pg  pkg  pi  pn  prsn  prs  ppl  pt  prv  prns  prmm 
prnspl  prch,  gr  grtr  gt,  I'd  rb  rf  rg  rj  rl  rm  rn  rmn  rs  rt  rv 
sd  sk  sf  shl  si  sm  sn  sps  spr  spt  sqr  sv  sx. 


CHAPTER  III. 


SYLLABIFICATION. 

THE    UNIFICATION    OF    SYLLABIC    OdTLINES." 

All  words  comprise  one  or  more  syllables.  The  syl- 
labification of  words  is  not  uniform.  "  In  the  United 
States  it  is  intended  to  indicate  their  pronunciation,  while 
in  English  practice,  words  are  usually  divided  so  as  to  show 
their  constituent  parts,  independently  of  the  pronunciation." 
In  Webster's  Dictionary  words  are  divided  so  as  to  repre- 
sent their  pronunciation  in  the  most  accurate  manner.  In 
writing  and  printing,  a  syllable  is  a  part  of  a  word  sepa- 
rated from  the  rest  and  capable  of  being  pi'onounced  by  a 
single  impulse  of  the  voice,  and  may  consist  of  a  single 
sound,  or  of  several  letters  capable  of  unification;  that  is, 
of  being  uttered  in  a  single  impulse  of  the  voice. 

The  essential  part  of  a  syllable  is  its  vowel,  whether 
represented  by  a  single  letter,  a  diphthong,  or  a  triphthong. 

There  are  four  kinds  of  syllables,  viz.: 

I.  Those  which    consist    of  a   single  vowel;    as   a-rea, 

/-dea. 

II.  A  vowel  with  one  or  more  consonants  aflixed;  as, 

o»,  (ipf.  (talcs. 

III.  A  vowel  with  one  or  more  consonants  prefixed;  as, 
so.  fi'ii,  plea. 

IV.  A   vowel   with  one  or   more  consonants   both   pre- 
fixed and  affixed;  as.  not,  said,  trusts,  claims. 

42 


SYLLABIFICATION.  43 

Much  modern  short-hand  consists  of  mere  consonant 
outlines  without  the  attendant  vowels.  If  the  reader  will 
pronounce  the  consonants  only  in  the  foregoing  illustrative 
syllables,  he  will  discover  the  reason  why  the  phonog- 
raphies of  the  day  are  so  uniformly  illegible  when  written 
at  a  speed  requiring  the  omission  of  vowels.  Take  the 
word  area ;  let  us  write  the  r,  and  we  shall  look  at  it  in 
vain  for  any  suggestion  of  area.  Take  the  word  on;  write 
n,  and  as  we  look  at  it,  it  as  readily  suggests  in,  or  an,  or 
no,  or  now,  as  it  does  on.  Take  apt;  omit  a,  and  the  I'e- 
maining  ^J^  looks  as  like  pat,  or  pit,  or  pet,  or  j^ot,  or  put, 
as  it  does  like  apt.  Take  asks,  and  omitting  a,  sks  more 
readily  suggests  skies,  or  scows,  or  skews,  than  it  does  asks. 
Take  so;  omit  o,  and  s  as  clearl}-^  suggests  saij,  or  see,  or 
sigh,  or  sue,  as  it  does  so.  Take  plea;  omit  ea,  and  we  have 
plaj/,  or  jj/y,  or  j^^ow,  or  apple.  Take  said ;  its  consonants 
alone  express  to  the  eye  sad,  sod,  sowed,  seed,  side,  sued,  as 
readily  as  they  do  said.  Take  claims;  its  elms  looks  as  like 
clams,  or  climes,  as  like  claims.  From  these  cases  it  is  evi- 
dent that  any  system  of  short-hand  so  constructed  that  the 
vowels  must  be  suppressed  in  order  to  secure  sufficient 
speed  in  writing,  must  be  more  or  less  illegible;  and  that 
the  greater  the  use  made  of  the  vowels,  the  more  legible  will 
be  the  writing. 

Eclectic  Short-hand  provides  for  the  full  writing,  or 
expression,  of  the  first  suU<d)le  of  every  word,  including  its 
vowel,  and  for  writing  as  many  other  vowels  in  the  word  as 
are  necessary  to  its  legibility,  without  lifting  the  pen. 
Each  syllable,  so  far  as  it  is  practicable,  is  expressed  by  a 
single  character,  and  in  many  instances  words  of  several 
syllables  are  fi-eely  expressed  by  fewer  strokes  than  the 


44   ._  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

number  of  their  syllables.  By  this  method  reading  is  much 
easier,  because  the  first  character  is  a  clear  writing  of  the 
full  first  syllable,  instead  of  a  combination  of  first  letters 
and  some  inflected  vowel  further  along  in  the  word. 

The  various  methods  employed  for  the  unification  of 
syllabic  outlines  are  treated  as  principles. 

PRINCIPLE    I. 

The  writing  of  initial  consonant  characters,  in 
such  a  manner  as  to  express  a  following  vowel, — 

Let  it  be  supposed  that  the  following  horizontal  line  is  one 
of  the  ruled  lines  on  a  sheet  of  writing  paper;  let  the  line 
represent  the  vowel  i  or  y.  We  will  now  write  consonants 
across  it,  each  consonant  so  written,  to  express  a  following 
/  or  y;  as  follows: 

7nij  hi    di/       di  si  fi  pi    ti    thi       li 


-G- 


,^    /  .^ .    ^ 


^5~ 


him  hiy        dip  Jig  tvit  sit  fil 

We  will  now  name  a  point  just  above  the  ruled  line  ^,  and 
we  have 

he        the      te    ne         we        le 


met  set  ned  sen  sel  wet 

Let  us  now  name  a  point  about  one-third  space  above  the 
line  a.  and  write 


SYLLABIFICATION.  45 

ma  ba       da  sa         ha  pa    ga   la     tha        far 


fal  sal  ban  bac  sat  sad 

If  we  now  name  a  point  just  below  the  line  o,  we  can  write 
no        go     ho    do  so  bo      lo        horn         not        bot 


form  gon  son  mod 


Having  assigned  a  position  to  each  vowel  except  w,  we  place 
it  about  one-third  space  below  the  line. 

fun  dun  sun  bun        gun      pun      pug 


hut         niut  nut  unid  cud  mud 

We  have  thus  a  complete  vowel  scale,  somewhat  like  the 
musical  scale,  offering  nothing  more  formidable  to  the  hand 
or  eye  than  the  scale  in  music,  which  even  children  learn 
to  read  and  practice  with  great  rapidity.  It  is  easy  to  re- 
member, because  it  is  in  alphabetical  order. 


The  pupil  will  note  that  this  is  the  method  of  writing 
the  third  class  of  syllables,  viz. :  those  beginning  with  a  con- 


46 


ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 


sonant  followed  by  a  vowel,  and  is  used  only  when  such  a 
syllable  makes  a  word,  or  when  it  begins  a  word. 

If  other  letters  or  syllables  follow,  they  are  written 
without  reference  to  position. 

Let  the  learner  study  out  the  following 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 


The  positions  are  used  to  express  the  various  sounds  of 
the  vowels,  precisely  as  the  characters  are;  thus,  e  position 
is  used  for  writing  the  sounds  of  e  heard  in  the  wo'rds  seat 
and  set,  greet  and  get.     They  are  also  used  to  express  the 

diphthongs;  as  follows: 


a  an  aw 

e  eit  ew 

-  i  oi  oy 

o  ou  ow 

u  oi)  do 


In  cases  in  which  it  is  desirable  to  mark  the  precise 
sound  intended  to  be  indicated,  a  dot  is  placed  above  any 
character  to  indicate  the  short  vowel;  a  minute  dash  to  in- 
dicate the  long  vowel,  and  two  dots  to  indicate  the  diph- 
thono-  sound. 


SYLLABIFICATION.  47 

^  2. 


These  illustrations  serve  to  show  that  the  written  char- 
acters, aided  by  the  context,  in  most  cases  render  the  use 
of  the  dots  unnecessary.  Their  use  is  to  be  reserved  for 
absolutely  doubtful  words. 

In  writing  the  following  lesson,  the  learner  must  omit 
every  silent  letter. 

WRITING    LESSON. 

Say,  see,  sigh,  sow,  sue  (sa,  se,  si,  so,  su),  same,  seem,  sin, 
son,  sum,  sat,  set,  sit,  sod,  soot,  sack  (sac),  sick,  sock,  suck, 
seek,  sag,  soggy  (sogy),  tan,  ten,  tin,  tone,  tun,  tune,  fan, 
fame,  fine,  foam,  fun,  fume,  pan,  pen,  pin,  pun,  pad,  pod, 
pray,  pry,  gray,  grow  (gro),  green,  grin,  grum,  gad,  God, 
good,  gas,  guess,  geese,  gave,  give,  gone,  gun,  dead,  did,  neat, 
night,  not,  nut,  nude,  neighed  (nad),  though  (tho),  through 
(thru),  safe,  lad,  led,  lied,  load,  lewd,  bay,  be,  bee,  bow, 
way,  we,  woe,  woo,  neigh,  no,  now,  new,  knife  (nif ),  cad, 
cid,  cod,  cud,  could  (cud),  would  (wud),  wad,  weighed 
(wad),  wet,  wit,  sit,  sat,  set,  sot,  soot,  yet. 

Let  the  learner  now  take  a  child's  primer,  or  first  reader, 
and  beginning  at  the  first  lesson,  write  several  pages  of  the 
short  words  which  begin  with  a  consonant,  or  consonants, 
followed  by  a  vowel,  until  any  consonant  can  be  readily 
placed  on  the  position  of  the  following  vowel. 

The  following  illustrations  will  serve  to  show  how  the 
different  consonants  are  written  on  the  positions. 


48 


ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

t 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 


(T)     tf>     '■■y^     O^  ■ 


p 


PRINCIPLE    II. 

The  writing  of  initial  vowel  characters  in  such  a 
manner  as  to  express  a  following  consonant,— The 

learner  will  note  that  this  principle  concerns  the  second 
class  of  syllables,  viz.:  those  beginning  with  a  vowel  fol- 
lowed by  a  consonant. 

Referring  again  to  the  horizontal  line,  we  now  assign  it 
another  value,  viz.:  /i,  not  iiitending  to  set  aside  or  supersede 
the  positions  fixed  under  Principle  I,  but  to  add  to  the 
positions  a  new  set  of  values.  Now  that  we  have  an  n 
position,  we  will  write  the  words  an  and  in,  by  drawing  a 
and  /  throush  the  line. 


cot     lit    on    on 


onr   inr  and 


unci 


f  J  /  V  ^ 


~7^ 


1)  ^^-v^ 


It  is  evident  that  this  writing  does  not  in  any  sense  con- 
flict with  that  of  the  former  principle.  Under  that  we  wrote 
an    initial    consonant   to  express   a   following  vowel,  thus 


8TLLABTFICATI0N.  49 

writing  syllables  of  the  third  class;  now  we  write  an  initial 
vowel  to  express  a  following  consonant,  thus  writing  sylla- 
bles of  the  second  class. 

We  will  now  name  the  position  above  the  line  s,  and 
write 

as   is   OS     es     us         asc      ism  asrt      est  usfl 

/  J  /  K    \   ^— /       /C,  V    \-^ 


Now  let  us  name  the  point  just  below  the  line  /,  and 
write 
a/    if    of     ef     uf     afr  ofr  efr       afrm       ofs     ofl    ofn 

//  /  V  ^  r /  K  L //^ 

We   now  proceed  to  name  the  point  about  one-third 
above  the  line  'p^  and  write 
a-p  ip  op     ep    up    apraprlaprtaprsopn  upr       uphv 

Having  left  the  fifth  position,  we  name  it  c,  which  means 
the  sound  expressed  by  k,  or  c  hard. 
ac  ic    oc    ec   ue      acr  ocr  icr  ucr    aes   ocn    acn      aers 


Having  in  this  manner  provided  for  the  expression  of 
these  five  consonants,  there  still  remains  a  number  of  con- 
sonants unprovided  for,  and  in  order  to  make  the  principle 
universal  in  its  application,  so  that  we  may  write  in  a 
similar  way  any  initial  syllable  beginning  with  a  vowel,  it 
is  necessary  to  find  a  position  for  each  of  the  consonants, 


50       .  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAKD. 

and  we  now  proceed  to  give  a  double  value  to  each  posi- 
tion, as  follows: 

pb 

S3 

mn 

eg 

The  additional  letters  which  we  have  now  assigned  to 
positions,  it  will  be  observed,  are  each  similar  in  sound  to 
the  letter  which  had  been  already  assigned  to  the  position; 
thus,  s  and  z  are  so  similar  in  sound,  that  they  may  be  used 
interchangeably  without  seriously  affecting  the  legibility 
of  words  in  which  they  are  so  treated.  One  meets  an 
acquaintance,  and  mutual  recognitions  are  extended  even 
before  details  of  countenance,  or  color  of  hair,  or  eyes,  can 
be  determined.  A  portrait  bearing  a  striking  general 
resemblance  is  often  a  better  likeness  than  one  of  very 
carefully  wrought  detail.  The  general  effect  is  quite  as 
convincing  as  a  closer  inspection.  In  the  following  sen- 
tence the  reader  will  have  no  difficulty  in  immediately 
determining  the  meaning  of  each  word:  It  iz  time,  my 
poy,  vor  you  to  ged  ub,  and  drez  yourzelv,  and  go  oud  to 
your  worg. 

The  two  letters  on  each  position  are  called  cognates. 

Let  us  now  place  two  more  cognates  on  the  fifth  posi- 
tion, viz.:  qu,  and  ,r.  The  sound  of  qu  is  civ,  and  of  x, 
cs.  To  write  the  word  equal  (ecwl),  we  write  e  on  c  posi- 
tion, and  add  icl,  making  eaci;  to  write  acquaint  (acwnt), 
place  a  on  c  position,  adding  to  it  wnt;  to  write  axe,  place 
a  on  e  position,  and  add  .?,  making  acs;  for  oxen,  place  o  on 
c  position,  and  add  s)i.  making  oesn. 

But  there  are  other  consonants  to  which  we  have  not 
yet  given  positions,  which  we  now  proceed  to  do: 


SYLLABIFICATION. 


51 


t  d  th 
chj  h 


We  have  now  two  sets  of  positioned  consonants,  which 
we  will  name  i-espectively  left  consonant  positions,  and  right 
consonant  positions. 


rr^^^'f) 


-J^"^' 


left, 
p  b 
t  z  sh 
-mn- 
fv 
eg  qux 


right. 


t  d  th 
chj  h 


'  f 


The  learner  has  not  forgotten  that  the  vowels  a,  i,  o, 
have  each  two  forms,  dependent  on  being  written  down- 
wards or  upwards. 

In  making  the  downward  strokes  we  describe  a  move- 
ment to  the  left,  and  in  the  upward  strokes  a  movement 
to  the  right;  hence,  the  downward  are  called  left  vowels, 
and  the  upward,  right  vowels.  In  writing  we  always  use 
the  left  vowel  —  downward  —  to  express  a  left  consonant, 
and  the  right  vowel  —  upward  —  to  express  a  right  conso- 
nant.    The  arrows  below  show  the  directions  of  the  vowels. 


ILLUSTRATIONS. 


52  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

-K^ey. — Ask,  als,  ism,  iln,  os,  old,  asrt,  aldr,  ana,  aro,  Ira, 
Ina,  oran,  orgn,  and,  argu,  end,  ers,  undr,  Ural,  evr,  et,  us, 
ul,  usfl,  ult,  est,  elm,  Esop,  elk,  estr,  els. 

The  characters  e  and  «,  being  sloped  backward,  are 
always  written  forward,  that  is,  downwards,  but  are  dis- 
tinguished as  left,  and  right,  by  the  degree  of  slope,  the 
left  being  written  nearly  vertical,  and  the  right  very 
slant;  corresponding,  in  their  appearance,  with  the  other 
vowel  characters. 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 


It  is  necessary  now  that  the  learner  shall  become  per- 
fectly familiar  with  the  entire  positional  alphabet.  Per- 
haps the  best  way  to  accomplish  this  is  to  repeatedly  write 
each  of  the  five  vowels,  and  the  diphthongs,  with  reference 
to  each  positional  letter.  To  illustrate:  let  us  take  a,  and 
write  it  through  the  various  positions.  If  we  write  down- 
ward a  on  first  position  we  have  ap,  ah;  writing  it  upward 
we  have  uw;  writing  it  on  second  position  we  have  as,  az, 
and  al;  writing  it  on  third  position  we  have  an,  am,  and 
ar;  writing  it  on  fourth  position  we  have  af,  av,  and  at, 
ad;  writing  it  on  fifth  position  we  have  ac,  ag,  acJi,  aj,  ah. 
Let  us  now  write  e  vertical  on  second  position,  and  we  have 
es,  ez;  writing  it  slant  we  have  el;  writing  it  vertical  on 
third  position  we  have  em,  en,  and  writing  it  slant  we  have 
er.  This  course,  repeatedly  practiced  with  each  vowel,  will 
not  only  fix  in  the  learner's  mind  the  correct  idea  of  writ- 
ing, but  the  positional  alphabet;   and  the  learner  should 


SYLLABIFICATION.  53 

not  relinquish  the  effort  until  all  is  thoroughly  mastered, 
and  he  is  able  to  write  promptly  either  vowel  on  position 
for  any  following  consonant. 

We  have  developed  in  these  two  principles,  first  and 
second,  not  only  the  method  of  writing  the  second  and 
third  xAass  ^f  syllables,  but  as  all  words  begin  with  either 
a  vowel  followed  by  a  consonant,  or  a  consonant  fol- 
lowed by  a  vowel,  we  have  illustrated  how  to  begin^  to 
write  any  word  in  the  language  except  those  comprising 
only  a  single  letter,  viz.:  a,  I,  and  0.  To  write  I,  we  place 
a  dot  on  i  position;  to  write  0,  place  a  dot  on  o  position. 
We  use  a  dot  on  e  position  to  express  the,  thee.  We  might 
write  a  by  a  dot  on  a  position,  but,  being  such  frequent 
words,  a  and  the,  in  rapid  writing,  would  be  likely,  fre- 
quently, to  become  involved;  therefore  we  use  the  dot  on  a 
position  for  ah,  and  write  a  in  the  same  way  that  we  do  an, 
viz.:  a  across  the  line,  as  we  can  always  determine,  either 
from  the  preceding  or  the  following  word,  whether  a  across 
the  line  is  for  o,  or  an.  A  boy,  not  an  boy,  an  apple,  not 
a  apple,  an  end,  not  a  end,  not  a,  but  an  hour. 

The  following  lesson  must  be  written  until  each  word 
can  be  readily  outlined,  and  recognized  at  sight,  when  the 
learner  will  be  fully  prepared  to  proceed  with  the  follow- 
ing principles. 

WRITING    LESSON. 

Ap,  as,  an,  af,  ac,  op,  os,  on,  of,  oc,  ip,  is,  in,  if,  ic,  ep,  es, 
en,  em,  ef,  ec,  ab,  az,  am,  av,  ag,  ib,  iz,  im,  iv,  ig,  ob,  oz, 
om,  ov,  og,  eb,  ez,  em,  ev,  eg,  ub,  uz,  um,  ug,  aw,  al,  ar,  at, 
ad,  ach,  aj,  ah,  ow,  ol,  or,  ot,  od,  oth,  och,  oj,  oh,  iw,  il,  ir,  it, 
id,  ith,  ich,  ij,  ih,  apr,  apl,  aprl,  apt,  away,  aware,  awake, 


54  ••  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

ash,  arson,  all,  also,  allay,  and,  ant,  amen  (amn),  are,  arrow 
(aro),  art,  ark,  after,  aver,  avert,  averse,  at,  add,  atlas  (atls), 
ado,  acre,  ague,  agree,  age,  again,  ah,  ahead,  open,  obtain 
(obtn),  opera  (opra),  owl,  owls,  owed,  os,  old,  older,  olden, 
on,  omen,  or,  oral,  order,  of,  offer,  over,  overt,  often  (ofn), 
oat,  odd,  odds,  oats,  other,  others,  oak,  ocre,  og,  oh,  ep,  eb, 
ew,  es,  ease,  easy,  ell,  ells,  elk,  em,  end,  empty  (emt),  era, 
eror,  ere,  Eva,  ever,  even,  effort,  eat,  eddy,  eats,  ether, 
either,  egg,  eggs,  each,  edge  (ej),  eh,  up,  upper  (upr),  us, 
uz.,  ul,  un,  uncle,  umpire,  um,  ural,  uvula,  utter  (utr), 
udder,  euchre  (ucr),  uh. 

Now  let  the  learner  again  take  the  primer,  or  first 
reader,  and  write  the  short  words  which  begin  with  vowels. 

Diphthongs. — These  characters,  being  heavy,  are  not 
easily  written  upward,  hence  no  attempt  is  made  to  write 
them  thus,  but  in  writing  them  on  the  positions  they  are 
uniformly  written  downward,  relying  on  the  context  to  de- 
termine whether  written  for  the  left  or  right  consonant. 
This  is  comparatively  easy,  because  the  consonants  which 
follow  them  are  so  limited.  Ou  is  generally  followed  by  t; 
oi  by  n  or  //  oo  by  z;  and  an  by  c,  g,  d,  t,  th,  r  and  s. 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 


Key. — Auspicious,  awl,  autumn,  oyster,  oil,  oily,  oils, 
oiliness,  ooze,  oozes,  oozing,  oint.  ointment,  owl,  our,  out, 
ours,  ourselves,  outset,  outside,  outlet,  outlay,  outline,  ousts, 
ouch,  oiitgo,  outwork.       For  picious  and  ness,  see  pp.  82  and  Tl. 


r 


SYLLABIFICATION. 


55 


V 


Ea^reme  Positions, — To  avoid  the  movement  from 
one  extreme  position  to  another,  as,  in  the  words,  in  a  few 
days,  any  word  may  be  written  immediately  under  another 
to  express  the  ooru  position,  and  immediately  over  another 
to  express  the  a  or  e  position.  It  may  seem  to  the  student 
that  the  suggestion  of  a  or  e,  o  or  w,  by  position,  is  too  in- 
definite, but  he  will  soon  find  that  the  context  is  a  most  im- 
portant aid  in  determining  all  such  trifling  points. 


ILLUSTRATIONS. 


Key. —  In  a  few  days.     Say  you  so.     But  make  you. 


EEADIXG  AND   WRITIXG   EXERCISE. 


-7^ 


-^ 


T^y 


_o  ^  —^/  ^  ^^^ 


,  ^ 


T 


56 


ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 


PKIKCIPLE    III. 

Lengthening  the  long  and  enlarging  the  surface 
characters,— KW  the  long  characters,  viz. :  c,  /,  w,  q,  r,  s, 

V,  w,  X,  y,  and  z,  may  be  lengthened  without  changing  their 
characteristic  appearance,  which  is,  therefore,  done  to  ex- 
press a  following  in  or  n.  The  long  letters  all  being  con- 
sonants, when  lengthened,  we  have  two  consonants  in  one 
stroke,  which  we  write  on  position  to  express  an  interme- 
diate vowel,  or  for  a  following  vowel,  in  case  the  consonant 
and  n  or  m  coalesce,  as  s)i.  s)n.  By  this  means  we  are  able 
to  express  several  hundred  syllables  of  the  fourth  class  each 
by  one  stroke.  CL  is  carried  across  to  add  m,  or  «.|    ~~z^ 

Let  the  learner  thoroughly  study  and  practice  many 
times  over  all  illustrative  exercises  in  this  and  the  succeed- 
ing principles. 

ILLrSTKATIOXS. 


SYLLABIFICATION. 


57 


Can  cane  came,  come  cone,  cim  cin,  same  sane,  seine 
seem  seen  scene,  sim  sin,  some  son  snow  smo,  sum  sun 
soon,  mam  man  maim  main,  mem  men  mean  mien, 
mine,  moan,  mum  raun  moon,  fame  fan  fain  fane,  fin 
fine,  foam  fon,  fume  fun,  wim  win  wine,  warn  wan 
wane,  won,  vain  vane  van,  vine  vim,  frame  farm,  from 
form,  firm,  snare,  sneer,  sinner,  snore,  summer,  canner,  cimmer, 
comer,  sinner,  summer,  wenner,  winner,  income,  inform  infirm, 
consent,  concerny  insane,  accent,  descent,  ascent,  invent, 
roman,  remain,  ireason,  raisin,  rosin,  recon,  raven,  fallen, 
solemn.] 

Thete  is  a  class  of  words  in  which  m  or  n  are  prominent 
in  both  the  first  and  last  syllables,  such  as  summon,  common, 
famine.  In  writing  these,  and  all  similar  words,  if  the  first 
letter  may  be  lengthened  to  add  the  first  m  or  w,  make  a 


58 


ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 


much  longer  sweep  to  express  in  the  same  line  also  the  final 
syllable,  giving  us  two  or  more  syllables  in  the  same  stroke. 


ILLUSTRATIONS. 


Key, —  Seaman,  salmon,  simon,  famine,  loeman  mammon, 
cannon,  common,  women,  woman,  Aenom,  freeman  freemen, 
foreman  foremen,  cannoner,  commoner,  summoner,  uncommon, 
envenom. 

Enlarging  the  surface  characters  to  express  a 
following  t  or  (2.— Lengthening  the  lineal  characters  and 
enlarging  the  surface  characters,  are  so  similar  as  to  be 
classed  under  the  same  principle.  The  surface  characters, 
Tij  /.  p,  and  (J,  may  be  enlarged  without  in  any  degree  im- 
pairing their  legibility,  which  is,  therefore,  done  to  add  a 
following  t  or  d,  giving  us  two  consonants  in  one  outline, 
which,  when  initial,  we  write  on  position  for  the  interme- 
diate vowel,  giving  us  syllables  of  the  fourth  class,  as  pat, 
pad,  gate,  gad,  light,  lied,  hat,  had,  tvrites,  rides.  Wherever 
t  ov  d  follows  a  surface  character,  whether  initial  or  other- 
wise, the  character  is  enlarged  for  the  following  letter. 
The  enlarged  h  is  also  used  final  for  sh  or  ch. 

As  the  long  characters  are  superlengthened  to  expi-ess  a 


SYLLABIFICATION. 


59 


final  ni  or  n,  or  both,  so  the  surface  characters  p,  g,  t,  h,  may 
be  superenlarged  to  express  a  second  t  or  d;  as,  in  patted, 
parted,  greeted,  incorporated,  adopted.    See  also  p.  102. 


ILLUSTRATION'S. 


TJ- 


<^  rr  t^  ^ 


-6- 

o   c^  r)  ^ 


^ 


?7 


-^^ 


-v^S^ 


(9 


.^ 


^  J7  ^      ^  ^^  O  JO 


o 


rS- 


^ 


JBTey.— Paid  pat  pawed  pad,  pet  peat,  pit,  pot  pod  pout, 

put,  part  pard  prat,  peered  pret,  port  poui'ed,  purred  pert, 

patter,  Peter,  pitter,  potter,  putter,  gate  gad  gaud,  guide, 

get.  got  goad  God,  good  gut,  great  grate  guard  grade,  greet, 

grit   girt    gird,   groat  gourd,  gaiter,   greater,   girder,   hat 

had,  head  heat,  hid  hit,  hod  hot,  hut,  hatter,  hard,  heater, 

heard,  hoard,  hired,  hats  hates,  heats  heads,  heaters  headei'S, 

hits  hides,  huts,  hods,  rates,  rides  rites  writes,  rods  roads, 

- — f 
ruts,/ late  laid  lad,  let  lead,  light  lied,  load  lot,  lute  lewd, 

ladder  later  latter,  lighter,  letter,  letters  leaders,  lighters, 

ladders,  called,  cold  colt,  killed,  salt  sailed,  soiled,  sullied. 


60  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

fault  failed,  mailed,  mild,  mold,  wild,  walled,  world,  catch, 
cash,  cashed,  washed,  watched,  wished,  fished,  mashed, 
matched,  botched,  touched,  lashes,  lached,  patted,  petted, 
pitted,  pouted,  repeated,  imparted  imported,  petard,  grated 
graded,  greeted,  gritted  girded,  interpreted,  incorporated, 
degraded,  imputed,  departed,  adopted,  adapted,  preempted.  < 


J 


PRINCIPLE    IV. 

Diminishing  characters,— As  long  characters  may  be 
lengthened,  so  also  may  short  characters  be  shortened,  and 
they  are,  therefore,  made  half  their  usual  length  to  express 
a  following  t  or  d,  giving  us  another  series'  of  two  letters  in 
one  character,  which  we  write  on  position  to  express  another 
letter,  and  thus  by  one  stroke  write  many  syllables  of  both 
the  second  and  third  class.     T  is  written  in  the  word  not. 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 


-^^r^;: — ^  \  ^  ^^-^ 


\, 


^/ 


-^-^ 


uj-^-^-rr^    '^^/      '^ 


'^^ 


Key.—  Bad  bat,  bed  bet,  bid  bit,  bod  hot  boat,  but  bud, 
bard  brad  brat,  bird  bright,  broad  brought,  hurt,  bruit, 
batter,  better,  bitter  bidder,  boater,  butter,  nat  gnat  nad, 
net  ned  need  knead,  nit  night,  nod  not  knot,  nut  nude, 
natr,  neater,  niter,  notary,  neuter,  tat  tad,  tet  ted,  tit  tid, 
tot  tod  toad,  tut  tud  toot,  trait  trade  tart  tarred,  treat  treed 


SYLLABIFICATION".  61 

tread,  trite  tried  tired,  trot  trod  toward,  trut  trad  tured, 
tatter,  tetter,  titter,  totter,  tutor  tooter,  date  dad,  debt 
dead,  did  died,  dod  dot  dowd,  dud  dut,  dared  drat  dart, 
dread,  dried  dirt,  dured  di-uid,  and  ant  aunt  aimed  amid, 
apt  abed  about,  ast,  aft,  act,  aprt  aboard  abroad,  assert, 
afraid  afford,  accord  accrued,  apter,  aster,  anter,  after,  acter, 
ipt,  ist,  int  ind,  ift,  ict,  inter,  opt,  ost,  ont,  oft,  oct,  oprt, 
osrt,  onrd,  ofrd,  ocrd,  ept,  est,  emt  end,  eft,  ect,  enter, 
effort,  upt,  ust  used,  und  unt,  uprd,  undr,  that,  thought. 
■^  Short  letters  made  minute,—  By  a  more  delicate  ap- 
plication of  the  fourth  principle,  the  short  letters  may  be 
made  into  minute  ticks,  which  is  done  to  express  a  follow- 
ing m  or  n,  or  y,  with  the  single  exception  of  the  charac- 
ter for  0,  which  is  made  minute  downwards  for  t,  d,  or  st, 
and  upwards,  for  s,'  z^^or  ss,  representing  the  final  syllables 
ses,  ces,  zes,  cies,  etc.  .The  upward  tick  is  used  initially 
only  for  s.S  Minute  y  is  used  for  short  /. 

The  combinations  st  and  ts  when  initial  are  expressed 
by  combining  the  two  ticks.     This  application  of  the  prin- 
ciple gives  us  many  syllables  of  the  second  and  fourth  class, 
^s^ach  expressed  by  one  stroke.  . 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 


-^v- 


l *— 


r^-^ 


■^7  ^" 


62  ECLECTIC   SHOET-HANl). 

Key. —  Ban  bam,  ben  bean  bem  beam,  bin  bim  been, 
bon  bom  bone  bomb,  bun  bum  boon  boom,  bran  barn, 
brine,  burn  bruin,  born,  banner,  bonner,  nan  name,  nin 
nine  nim,  non  nom,  nun  num  numb  none,  bank,  brink, 
tan  tame,  ten  teem,  tin  time,  tone  town,  tune,  turn,  tram 
train,  trin  trim,  trum,  turn,  dan  dam,  down,  den  dem  deem, 
dim  din  dine,  dom  dome  don,  done  dun  dunn  dumb  doom, 
dinner,  than,  thank,  thin  thine,  think,  then  them,  thumb, 
upon,  amen,  again,  even,  oven,  union,  unum,  assent,  agent, 
stain,  steam  stem,  strike,  just,  stop,  strap,  stride,  most,  Bos- 
ton, sad,  seas,  size,  face  faces,  force  forces,  these  thesis, 
moss  Moses,  fast,  cast,  jester,  sting,  strong,  strung,  penny, 
sunny,  funny,  Jenny. 

Surface  letters  diminished, —  The  purpose  of  this  ap- 
plication of  the  fourth  principle  is  to  express  a  following  I 
or  lif.  The  j)  and  g  are  diminished  when  initial  for  the 
coalescents  7:)?  and  gl,  as  in  play,  glee.  They  are  diminished 
when  final  and  medial  for  both  the  coalescents,  and  for  the 
syllables  pal,  pel,  pul,  jile,  etc.  To  write  the  syllable  pal, 
p)el,  etc.,  initial,  use  both  letters.  The  I  is  made  minute  for 
fl  initial  and  final,  and  for  hj  final.  All  the  surface  charac- 
ters are  diminished  to  express  a  following  I  or  hj.  By  this 
contraction,  we  express  many  syllables  of  the  third  and 
fourth  class. 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 


SYLLABIFICATION.  63 


Key.— Flay,  plea,  plow,  place,  please,  plows,  plus, 
plan,  glad,  glide,  glue,  glow,  glowed,  pale  pail,  peel  peal,  pole, 
pails,  pills  piles,  pulls,  gales,  gills,  gold,  bale  hall,  heel 
hell,  hill,  hole,  hull,  halls  hails,  holes,  hills,  holy,  helve, 
hulk,  rails,  railed,  realm,  relief,  relic,  rolic,  really,  sally, 
silly,  Nelly,  Billy,  folly,  fully,  family,  finely  finally,  seemly, 
mainly,  flame,  fled,  flies,  floss,  flash,  flesh,  flush,  flashily, 
shall,  shell,  shoulders,  chills,  wheels,  while,  who'll,  thill, 
they'l,  sinful-ly,  awful-ly,  mouthful,  successful-ly,  .hand- 
some-ly,  peaceful-ly,  fearful-ly,  manful-ly,  baleful-ly,  cheer- 
ful-ly,  careful-ly. 

PRINCIPLE    V. 

Unified  coalescent  consonants, — The  frequent  occur- 
rence of  the  coalescent  consonants  makes  it  important  to 
provide  as  far  as  practicable  for  their  unification,  especially 
so  when  beginning  words,  that  they  may  be  written  in  a 
single  outline  to  express  the  following  vowel;  also  when 
final  or  medial,  that  they  may  suggest  syllables.  All  of  the 
unified  coalescents  are  valuable,  giving  us  many  syllables 
of  the  third  class.  The  coalescents  are  br,  cr,  dr,  fr,  gr,  pr, 
thr,  and  shr,  bl,  cl,fl,  gl,  pi,  si;  tiv,  thiv,  dw,  sw;  sm,  sn;  st, 
sp;  sf  (sph),  sc,  squ,  and  ns,  nc.  Having  several  classes,  we 
will  consider  one  class  at  a  time. 

Coalescent  r.— The  alphabetical  sign  for  r,  a  shaded 
character,  was  selected,   that  the    connection   between  a 


64  .,  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

shaded  character  and  a  shade  on  any  other  character,  to 
represent  r,  might  be  natural  and  easily  comprehended. 
Whenever  r  follows  either  &,  c,  (?,  /,  g^  or  _p,  as  a  coalescent, 
it  is  expressed  by  shading  its  preceding  letter;  but  when  a 
vowel  separates  them,  use  the  circle  for  r.  When  r  follows 
any  other  consonant  than  those  above  named,  it  may  be  ex- 
pressed by  either  the  shade  or  the  circle,  at  the  pleasure  of 
the  writer. 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 


JKey.— Break,  bark,  brief,  beer,  brought,  board,  brush, 
burrs;  cry,  creep,  crow,  core,  crape,  carp,  crops,  corporate; 
draw,  dare,  drear,  dear,  drone,  dormant,  drug,  during;  free, 
fear,  fry,  fire,  frame,  farm,  from,  form;  gray,  gar,  grow, 
gore,  grown,  gormand;  pray,  par,  probe,  pour. 

Coalescent  I. —  This  semi-vowel,  liquid,  coalesces  with 
the  consonants  &,  c,  /,  g,  p,  and  s,  uniting  with  them  and  a 
following  vowel  to  form  syllables. 

PI,  hi.  These  cognate  coalescents  are,  either  of  them, 
represented  by  mimtte  p,  which  is  the  simpler  outline,  and  is, 
when  final,  generally  written  as  a  hook. 

ILLUSTRATIOXS. 


K./ 


SYLLABIFICATION.  65 

Key.— Vlay,  pale,  plea,  peel,  ply,  pile,  plow,  pole,  place, 
pails;  blame,  plum,  plunge,  plaid,  plead,  plain,  blind,  blend, 
bless. 

CI,  gl.  These  cognates  are  expressed  by  a  minute  g, 
and  a  minute  hook.  When  initial,  use  g  for  gl,  and  the  hook 
for  cl;  but,  when  final,  use  whichever  is  more  convenient. 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 


Co 
"Key. —  Clean,  clam,  clay,  clue,  cliff,  cloth,  clock,  cluck, 
cleave,  clefi",  class,  close,  close,  clod,  clawed,  gloss,  glad,  glass, 
single,  mingle,  sickle,  gurgle,  beagle. 

Fl.  This  coalescent  is  expressed  by  a  minute  I,  which, 
when  final,  is  distinguished  from  ly  by  being  turned  on  the 
irregular  side  of  the  letter  to  which  it  is  attached.  When 
final  it  is  also  used  {ox  fly. 

illustrations. 

Cl «3_ 


e>   /7  <5/  ^ 

/7- 


'77- 


/ 


Key.—  Flame,  fling,  flung,  flange,  fled,  floss,  flues,  flesh, 
flush,  fleshly,  flashily,  flap,  flag,  flip,  flog,  flay,  fail,  flew  flue, 
full,  flee  flea,  fell,  manly,  manfully,  seemly  sinful-ly,  fear- 
ful-ly,  useful-ly,  youthful-ly,  beautiful-ly. 

SI,  zl,  when  coalescent,  is  expressed  by  I  turned  on  the 
s  tick. 


All  of  the  foregoing   coalescent   characters  may   also, 

^5  '  V. 


66 


ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 


J 


when  final,  be  used  to  express  a  final  y,  making  ply,  hly,  cly, 
gly,  Jly,  sly^  For  ves,  see  p.  69. 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 


Key. —  Slay,  sail,  slow,  sole,  slew,  sully,  sled,  slide,  slain, 
slim,  sling,  slung,  sleep,  slope,  slippery,  sloops,  slag,  slug, 
slaves. 

Coalescent  sp.— When  this  occurs  initially,  it  is  repre-^ 
sented  by  a  hook  turned  on  the  upper  side  of  the  following 
letter,  but  when  medial  or  final  it  is  expressed  by  s  fol- 
lowed by  J)  hook,  or  by  the  p  hook  only.  In  some  cases  it 
may  be  expressed  by  p  hooked  on  s  tick.  If  it  follows  tv,  c, 
or  V,  turn  the  hook  on  the  upper  side  for  the  sp.  The  sp 
hook  may  be  diminished  for  ftjil,  and  enlarged  for  spt,  spd. 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 


JS.e*/.— Spin,  sip,  spade,  saps,  spring  sip,  speak  spike 
spoken,  spook,  splint,  splash,  vesper,  wisp,  lisps  spy. 

Coalescent  sc,  squ. — When  initial,  a  small  semi-circu- 
lar character,  resembling  the  right  half  of  h,  divided  verti- 
cally, is  used,  united  angulai-ly  with  the  following  character. 
When  final,  use  the  c  hook  to  represent  it,  or  write  s  with 
c  hook  attached. 

ILLUSTRATIOXS. 


'>7 


^ 


-3— 


:i 


=^- 


-chi    /yL 


SYLLABIFICATION.  67 

Key, —  Scant,  scarce,  skin  skim  skip,  scoop  scud  Scotch, 
scratch,  school,  scholar,  skill,  skiff,  scathe,  squirm,  squalid, 
squeamish,  desk,  dusk,  fisk,  musk  brisk,  bask,  flask,  whisk. 

Coalescent  sc,  as  in  scent, —  In  very  careful  writing  it 
may  be  desirable  to  express  this  sound,  which  is  done  by 
omitting  c  and  placing  a  dot  or  comma  under  s,  to  indicate 
the  added  soft  c  sound. 

Coalescent  sph,  sf,  is  represented  by  retracing  the  s. 
It  is  also  used  to  express  r.    See  also  p.  102. 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 


-^^ 


Key. — Sphere,  spherical,  spheres,  save,  saves. 
Coalescent  st  is  expressed  by  the  s  and  t  ticks  united. 


ILLUSTRATIONS. 


Key. —  Stain  stay  sat,  steam,  sets,  stow  sot,  stue,  suit 
state,  sti-aight,  street,  steep,  still,  stole,  strong  strung, 
strange  stretch. 

Coalescent  sn,  sm,  are  expressed  by  the  lengthened  s. 

Coalescent  w.— This  letter  following  t,  th,  d,  and  s,  as 
a  coalescent,  is  expressed  by  greater  curvature  of  the  initial 
character. 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 


Key.— Twine   twain   thuack,    thwart,   dwell,   dwindle, 
sweet,  swim,  sweep,  swims,  swarms. 


68  '  ECLECTIC  SHOKT-HAKD. 

Coalescents  xp,  oct,  and  xc, — Words  which  begin  with 
ex,  the  e  is  omitted,  and  the  x  is  written  on  position  for  the 
following  vowel.  If  in  such  words  x  is  followed  by  p,  c 
hard,  or  t,  try  to  unite  the  letters  in  the  closest  union,  to 
express  their  coalescence,  by  the  use  of  hooks  for  p  and  c 
hard,  the  tick  for  t,  and  the  s  tick  for  soft  c,  uniting  the  p 
angularly  when  not  coalescent,  using  the  character  c  when 
not  coalescent,  and  the  horizontal  t  when  not  coalescent. 
The  r  often  follows  these  coalescents,  and  should  be  ex- 
pressed by  the  shade.  If  I  follows  xp  or  xc,  make  the  hook 
minute  to  express  it.  In  all  these  cases  the  x  is  written  on 
position  for  the  vowel  following  the  coalescents. 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 


Key. —  Expe],  explain,  expose,  exhibit,  except,  explode,  ex- 
press, exclaim,  exclude,  execute,  extol,  extreme,  excite. 

Pr  when  final,  or  intermediate,  may  be  expressed  by 
citrle  r  on  the  irregular  side  of  the  preceding  letter,  omit- 
ting p.     It  is  made  luimito  to  add  I. 

ILLUSTRATIOXS. 


Key.—  Express,  export,  expires,  suppress,  surprise,  de- 
press, simpers,  somber,  nippers,  sappers. 


SYLLABIFICATION. 


69 


PRINCIPLE    VI. 

Unified  uncoalescent  consonants.— The  frequent  re- 
currence of  s  as  the  second  and  third  letter  in  syllables 
makes  the  unification  of  s  with  other  characters  so  far  as 
practicable  important;  therefore  we  take  advantage  of  the 
reversible  nature  of  the  chai'acters  c,  tv,  and  v,  writing 
them  downwards  to  express  a  following  s  in  the  same  sylla- 
ble. Occasionally  it  will  be  inconvenient,  as  in  writing  on 
the  fifth  position,  in  which  case  it  will  be  better  to  draw 
them  upwards,  adding  the  s.  It  is  not  generally  best  to 
write  c  downwards  when  beginning  a  tvord,  because  of  its 
likeness  to  qu.  The  letters  y,  b,  x,  and  z,  may  be  written 
nearly  vertical,"  by  those  whose  hand  offers  no  resistance  to 
the  action,  to  add  a  following  s,  as  in  yes,  yours,  base,  boys, 
excise.  Also,  the  vowels  a,  i,  and  o  may  be  written,  in  the 
middle  or  at  the  end  of  a  word,  downward,  as  though  on  s 
position,  to  express  a  following  s,  while  e  and  w  may  be 
written  nearly  vertical  for  the  same  purpose.  This  con- 
traction gives  us  syllables  of  the  fourth  class. 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 


^r—ri 


Key. — Was,  wise,  woes,  wait,  wet,  wisely,  wars,  wires, 
wears,  worse,  vase,  vice  voice,  views,  varies,  virus,  vassal, 


70     -  ECLECTIC   SHOET-HAND. 

visual,  it  was,  he  was,  how  was,  so  was,  there  was,  always 
all  was,  yes,  base,  boss,  boys,  bores,  bars,  bears,  yes  sir, 
yours,  years,  excise,  exist,  excises,  exercise  exercises,  it  is,  so 
is,  he  is,  how  is,  there  is,  that  is,  this  is,  so  as,  not  as,  do  as, 
all  as  allays,  arrays,  betrays,  morose,  repose,  jocose,  sur- 
cease, increase,  decrease,  refuse,  abuse,  situates,  imposes. 

Pch,  psh, — These  combinations  with  a  vowel  after  p 
enter  into  various  words,  generally  initially.  They  are 
represented  by  the  p  character  written  horizontally,  open- 
ing to  the  right,  and  when  followed  by  other  letters  united 
with  them  angularly.    It  may  be  enlarged  to  express  t  or  d. 

Pch  and  sj)  are  expressed  by  a  similar  character,  except 
that  SJ)  unites  directly  with  a  following  character,  while 
jjch  unites  angularly.  When  disconnected  and  written  on 
the  vowel  position,  sj)  makes  only  the  words  sjjy,  spew,  which 
are  so  unimportant  as  to  make  no  practical  conflict  be- 
tween them  and  2)ttch  and  push. 

2j   /'  ILLUSTRATIONS. 


Jiey.— Patch,  peacl),  pitch,  pitcher,  approach,  push, 
pusher,  preach  perch  perish,  preacher,  patched,  peached, 
pitched,  approached,  pushed,  patches,  peaches,  preaches, 
preachers,  pitches,  poaches,  approaches,  pushes,  impeach, 
approachable,  impeachable,  impeaches,  impeachment,  patch- 
ing,   peaching,    pitching,    approaching,    pushing,   impeach- 


SYLLABinCATIOir.  71 

ing,  poacher,  patcher,  speech,  special,  specially,     peaches, 
specious. 

NSf  nc,  »ws.— These  are  never  initial,  but  occur  in 
the  midst  of  words  and  as  final,  representing  the  syllables 
ence,  ense,  ince,  ance,  ounce,  uns,  etc.  It  is  represented  by  a 
semicircle  the  opposite  of  the  character  for  sc,  and  is 
always  united  angularly  to  the  under  side  of  the  preceding 
letter,  so  turned  as  to  make  an  acute  angle  in  joining.  It 
is  enlarged  for  nts,  nds;  as,  sends,  mounts,  and  is  dimin- 
ished for  nsl,  ncl;  as,  pencil,  utensil.  When  t  or  d  follows 
it,  the  tick  is  used.  When  plural,  a.s  fences,  it  is  written  on 
the  upper  side  of  the  letter  to  which  it  is  attached  to  indi- 
cate an  added  tick,  which  is  written  upward. 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 


3    3     i''    /    =    i     ^    ^< 


Key, —  Dense,  sense,  fines,  France,  fans,  pens  pence, 
pins  pines,  tones,  tons  tuns  tunes,  immense,  immenseness, 
intense,  intenseness,  evince,  offense,  off"ends,  sends,  finds, 
commence,  commends,  commences,  dances,  senses,  wince, 
winces,  evinces,  senseless,  fenceless,  immensely,  intensely, 
pencil,  tinsel,  utensil,  expense,  expenses,  expends,  expensive, 
expensiveness,  experience. 

PRINCIPLE    VII. 

Representation  of  syllables  by  their  consonants. — 

In  writing,  the  first  syllable  of  every  word  contains  and 


72  ■'  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

expresses  its  vowel,  making  its  pronunciation  clear,  but 
following  syllables  are  frequently  expressed  by  mere  conso- 
nant outlines;  as,  consume  consm,  inform  infrm,  concern 
consrn,  amend  amnd,  intend  intnd,  inhuman  inhmn,  stupen- 
dous stupnds,  excitement  xitmnt. 

Short  words,  however,  which  both  begin  and  end  with  a 
vowel,  should  usually  have  both  written;  as,  obey  oba, 
annoy  anoy,  decay  deca,  agree  agre,  idea  ida  or  ide,  allay 
ala,  away,  awa,  easy  esy,  or  esi. 

HOOKS    AND    CIRCLES. 

That  the  confusion  which  the  learner  is  liable  to  expe- 
rience concerning  the  direction  in  which  to  turn  the  initial 
and  final  hooks,  the  distinction  between  p  and  g  when 
joined  to  the  several  classes  of  letters,  and  the  circles,  may 
be  ovei'come,  it  seems  desirable  at  this  point  to  devote 
special  attention  to  them.  A  careful  study  of  the  following 
figures  will  serve  to  correct  any  errors  concerning  these 
particulars. 

Tfie  Hooks. — When  ^J  is  initial  it  unites  with  all 
following  letters  angularly  except  g,  h  and  I,  and  down- 
ward a,  0,  and  /,  c,  w,  and  v.  Final  j)  may  unite  angularly, 
but  generally  turns  as  a  hook,  and  always  on  the  upper 
side,  except  after  c,  ir,  i;  h,  I,  sh,  ch,  nh,  when  it  turns  as  a 
hook  on  the  easier  side.  After  any  circle  or  after  a  loop  it 
is  always  made  as  a  hook. 


^//3- 


^^ 


SYLLABIFICATION.  73 

In  such  syllables  as  pipe,  peep,  etc.,  slant  p  backwards 
to  express  the  following  I?,  unless  the  leai'ner  finds  it  easier 
to  write  both  ps.  P  is  often  used  for  b,  especially  in  case  of 
bl,  the  minute  p  being  easier  than  bl. 

Initial  g  unites  angularly  except  before  p  and  circle  r. 
Final  ff  generally  turns  as  a  hook,  always  on  the  under 
side.  After  circles  it  unites  angularly.  It  is  sometimes 
lased  for  j  when  j  would  write  badly;  as,  after  n,  and  then 
unites  angularly;  as,  in  the  word  lounge.  After  s  and  d, 
it  may  be  joined  angularly  instead  of  being  turned  as  a 
hook  because  it  makes  a  better  outline. 

G  is  frequently  used  for  c,  when  final.  It,  like  p,  is 
sloped  backwards  to  denote  its  repetition;  as  in  gage,  gaj. 


ILLUSTRATIOXS. 


■LP     C/^    C^    O^ 


Final  y,  when  it  represents  short  i,  as,   in  many,  is 
expressed  by  a  very  minute  y. 


ILLUSTRATIONS. 


^' 


-# 


Circles* — The  circle  being  used  for  both  h  and  r,  it  is 
necessary  to  employ  some  means  of  distinguishing  each. 
The  circle  disconnected  always  represents  h;  when  connected 
with  another  letter  the  circle  is  joined  angularly  for  /^,  and 
continuously  for  r. 


74         ••  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

SJi, — This  is  usually  represented,  when  initial,  by  s  ticJc 
and  the  circle,  but  in  the  midst  of  or  at  the  end  of  a  word, 
by  the  enlarged  circle  written  on  the  regular  side  of  the 
letter  to  which  it  is  attached. 

Ch. — This  when  initial  is  expressed  by  minute  b  with  a 
circle,  but  in  the  midst  of  or  at  the  end  of  a  word  it  is  usu- 
ally represented  by  the  enlarged  circle  turned  on  the  irreg- 
ular side  of  the  letter  which  it  follows,  or  attached  to  it 
angularl}'. 

WJi, — This  is  represented  by  a  minute  tv  and  circle,  al- 
ways written  by  a  downward  movement. 

Occasionally  it  is  more  convenient  to  represent  ch  by  c 
and  h,  and  sh  by  s  and  h. 

The  word  tvhich  is  represented  by  minute  w  and  an  en- 
larged circle,  or  by  u-h  and  enlarged  h. 

In  words  beginning  with  the  outline  hp  the  h  is  written 
inside  of  jh  while  r  preceding  p  is  always  expressed  by  a 
shade.  //  and  r  initial  are  both  enlarged  to  add  t  and  d, 
and  are  both  diminished,  whether  initial,  medial,  or  final, 
to  express  a  following  /. 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 


SYLLABIFICATION. 


76 


^     ^ »i     ^    ty-^o    9'   <^ r>    <^ 


°S      d-     .^/f- 


Jley. —  Has,  hand,  hath,  heave,  hook,  happy,  hope,  heap, 
hats,  hits,  heats,  halls,  hills,  held,  hallow,  behave,  behoof, 
behead,  beheld,  inhere,  adhei*e,  cohere,  hat,  hit,  hot,  hut,  heat, 
hates,  heating,  hardness,  huts,  rain,  ram,  river,  rover,  I'e- 
verse,  remain,  Roman,  revel,  railes,  rites  writes  rights,  rods, 
realm,  relief,  rock,  rollick,  relict,  sir,  sore,  sorely,  sure, 
surely,  car,  careless,  shade,  she,  show,  shut,  shine,  shall, 
shells,  shilling,  chain,  chief,  cheat,  chat,  chase,  chores, 
cheese,  chap,  chip,  chop,  chaps,  chops,  chill,  shape,  ship, 
shop,  shapes,  ships,  shops,  shapeless,  shoppers,  cash,  catch, 
wish,  witch,  wishes,  witches,  sash,  such,  fish,  mush,  much, 
rash,  rush,  reach,  wretch,  rare,  rear,  roar,  ray,  I'ow,  rue,  rye, 
hay,  he,  how,  hue,  what,  when,  why,  who,  where,  while, 
which,  whereto,  wherefore,  whereat,  whei'eunto,  whereas, 
wherewithal. 

PRINCIPLE    VIII. 

The  arhitrai'y  representation  of  syllables. — This 
principle  refers  chiefly  to  the  representation  of  those  long 


~h 


76        ■•  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

and  involved  prefixes,  of  frequent  occurrence,  which  are 
not  readily  expressed  by  the  simple  means  of  syllabification 
already  provided,  and  to  frequent  suffixes  requiring  a  brief 
writing.  Similar  arbitraries  are  used  in  all  systems  of 
shorthand. 

PREFIXES. 

We  are  able  by  the  positional  alphabet  to  fully  write 
most  prefixes,  but  there  are  a  few,  which,  because  of  their 
length,  it  is  desirable  to  express  arbitrarily.  The  sign  of  a 
prefix  is  its  first  letter.  The  signs,  except  three,  con  com, 
amb,  and  re,  are  written  without  reference  to  position,  and 
naturally  stand  on  or  near  the  horizontal  line.  The  sign, 
com,  con,  is  written  on  position  for  the  following  vowel, 
making  coma,  come,  comi,  como,  comu.  It  may  take  an 
added  t,  tr,  jhl^l,  2>>',  fl,  s,  or  be  lengthened  for  m,  n.  In  case 
of  the  addition  of  either  of  these  letters  it  is  still  written 
on  position  for  the  vowel  following,  as  conta,  contra,  compe, 
comjyle,  compre. 

The  sign  for  amh,  ambi,  amph,  amphi,  is  a  written  across 
the  line,  making  am. 

The  sign  for  re  is  r  circle  turned  on  the  outside  of  a 
following  letter,  consonant  or  vowel,  which  is  written  on 
position  for  the  following  letter,  re  being  treated  as  if  it 
were  part  of  the  letter  to  which  it  is  attached. 

All  the  signs  except  re  are  written  across  by  the  first 
letter  of  the  following  syllable. 

LIST    OF    PREFIXES    AND    SIGNS. 

Prefixes.               Signs.                     Prefixes.  Signs. 

Accom  accoun               a  Adminis  ad 

Amb       ambi  amp  Author  au 

amphi                           am  Circum  sm 


SYLLABIFICATION. 


77 


Prefixes. 

Signs. 

Ftefixes. 

Sig7i8. 

Com  con 

c 

Quadra- ri-ru 

3 

Discom-con 

d 

Re 

r  circle 

Govern 

9 

Recog-com-con-cor 

r 

Incog-cora-con-cor 

i 

Satis 

st  tick 

Miscog-com-con-cor 

m 

Trans 

t  tick 

Noncom-con 

n 

Self 

s 

Omni  omnip  omnis 

Substan-sti 

sp 

omniv 

0 

Uncom-con-cor 

u 

Precom-con 

P 

Excom 

X 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 

4-  ^/ 


^A 


^    y  ,  '^^^-^  ^  ^ — >  -^  '^~"-^/ 


78  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND, 

Xcy.— Accommodate,  accommodation,  accomplish,  ambi- 
ent, ambidexter,  amphibious,  administer,  administrate,  ad- 
ministration, administratrix,  authorize,  authority,  authori- 
zation, circumstance,  circumference,  command,  commend, 
communion,  commit,  conceit,  console,  concern,  contact,  con- 
flict, conflagration,  contravention,  company,  companion, 
complain,  complete,  compliment,  complication,  compre- 
hend, comprehension,  contusion,  discompose,  discontend, 
government,  governess,  governor,  governing,  incommode, 
incomprehensible,  incorrupt,  misconstruct,  misconceive, 
miscorafort,  nonconformer,  noncontent,  noncontributing, 
omniforni,  omnipotence,  omnipotent,  omnivagant,  precon- 
ceive, precondemn,  preconcur,  precontrive,  quadrature, 
quadrennial,  quadrilateral,  quadruped,  reference,  reform, 
remind,  remove,  renew,  reserve,  retake,  reservoir,  reunite, 
reorganize,  reenter,  reiterate,  recognize,  recommend,  re- 
nown, relent,  rely,  really,  return,  satisfy,  satisfaction,  satis- 
factory, transfer,  transmit,  transact,  selfish,  selfwilled, 
substantial,  substantive,  substantiate,  uncompromising, 
uncomfortable,  unconcerned,  uncorrupt,  uncomplimentary, 
unaccountable,  unaccom modating. 

The  following  lists  comprise  most  of  the  prefixes  of  the 
language.  In  writing  them  only  those  of  the  preceding 
list  should  be  written  across,  the  others  being  written  con- 
nected with  the  following  letters.  With  a  school  diction- 
ary the  pupil  will  readily  find  words  for  practicing  them, 
which  should  be  thoroughly  done. 

SASOX    PREFIXES. 

A  after  all.  be  by,  en  em,  for  fore,  im  in,  mis,  out  over, 
un  under  up.  with. 


SYLLABIFICATIOSr.  79 

LATIN    PREFIXES. 

A  ab  abs  ad  ac  af  ag  al  an  ap  ar  as  at  ant  ante  anti  amb 
amphi,  cent  cento  centu  cis  contra  contro  co  cog  com  con 
counter  col  cor  circum,  de  demi  di  dif  dis  der  dus,  ef  ec  em  en 
es  ev  ex  extra  equi,  hemi,  ig  il  im  in  inter  intro  infra,  juris 
juxta,  mal  male  manu  mis  raulti,  ne  non  noct,  ob  oc  of  op 
omni,  pan  panto  per  pleni  post  pre  preter  prim  primo,  quad, 
retra  re  retro,  se  semi  super  supra  sub  subter  sue  suf  sug 
BUS  sine,  trans  tri,  un  uni. 

GREEK    PREFIXES. 

A  an  ana  amphi  anti  anto  apo  aph  aristo  astro  auto,  bis 
biblio,  cata  choro  chiro  cbrono  cosmo,  deca  dia  dys,  em  en 
entomo  epi,  geo,  belis  bepta  hetero  hydro  hyper  hypo,  lexico 
litho,  meta  miss  miso  mitho,  oct  octa  octo  ortho  ornitho 
osteo,  para  penta  peri  phil  philo  photo  poly  physico  physio 
proto  pyro,  steno  stereo,  sy  sys  sym  syn,  topo  theo  typo,  zoO. 

SUFFIXES. 

While  many  suflBxes  themselves  suggest  their  expression 
in  a  simple  and  brief  manner,  there  are  othei-s  which  from 
frequent  occurrence  and  long  outline  require  brief  arbitrary 
expression. 

Many  of  the  suffixes  of  our  language  may  be  grouped  in 
classes,  and  one  sign  will  frequently  answer  for  all  the  indi- 
viduals of  a  class;  as,  able,  ably,  uhleness,  ahility,  is  a  group 
of  which  any  sign  which  will  represent  one  may  equally 
clearly  represent  each  individual  of  the  class.  Take  these 
sentences.  Is  he  a  reliable  man?  We  are  reliably  informed 
that  he  is  a  man  of  sterling  reliability.  If  the  words 
reliable,  reliably,  and  reliability  were  written  alike,  as,  for 
instance,  relbl,  we  have  Is  he  a  relbl  man?  I  am  relbl  in- 


80  "'  ECLECTIC    SHORT-HAND. 

formed  that  he  is  a  man  of  sterling  relbl;  which  the 
stenographer,  accustomed  to  contracted  forms  of  words, 
would  readily  interpret  correctly. 

Take  the  following  class  of  suffixes: 
able  ably  ableness  ability 
ible  ibly  ibleness  ibility 
oble  obly  obleness  obility 
ubl  ubly  ubleness  ubility 
eeble  eebly  eebleness 

In  this  entire  family  it  is  quite  clear  that  hi  is  a  suffi- 
cient expression  for  the  ble,  bly,  bleness,  bility,  the  preceding 
vowel  having  been  either  alphabetically  or  positionally 
expressed;  as,  noble  is  fully  expressed  by  n  on  o  position, 
followed  by  bl. 

I  CLASSIFIED     SUFFIXES,    TERMINATIONS,    AND     SIGNS. 

Attached  Signs. —  In  the  following  class  the  signs  are 
attached  to  the  preceding  character  without  lifting  the  pen. 


able  eeble  ible  oble  uble 

bl 

,  ably  eebly  ibly  obly  ubly 

bly 

i  ableness  eebleness  ibleness  obleness 

ubleness 

bins 

ability  ibility  obility  ubility 

bit 

ality  elity  ility  olity  ulity 

It 

ash  esh  ish  osh  ush 

sh 

ashly  eshly  ishly 

shly 

asely  isely  ously 

sly 

ashness  eshness  ishness  ousness 

shns 

tion  tian  cion  cean  sion  sian 

shn  ' 

cious  cious  tuous  ceous 

shs    \oY  shn  tick 

tial  cial  sial 

shl  j 

SYLLABIFICATION.  81 


ac  ack  ick  eck  ock  uck 

c 

ant  ent  int  ont  unt 

nt 

and  end  ind  ond  und 

nd 

al  el  il  ol  ul  ule 

1  or  yl 

ase  ays  ise  ize  ees  eze  ose  oze  use 

s  — z 

ary  arry  ory  orry  ery  erry  iry  iery  ury  urry 

ly 

an  en  in  on  un 

n 

ame  eem  earn  ime  ome  oom  ume  urn 

m 

ad  ed  id  od  ud 

d 

at  et  it  ot  ut 

t 

ang  eng  ing  ong  ung 

ng 

ance  ence  ince  once  unce 

ns 

ancey  ency 

nsy 

mant  raent  mint  mont  munt 

rant 

mand  mend  mind  mond  mund 

rand 

lass  less  liss  loss  luse 

Is 

adly  edly  edley  idly  odly  udly 

dly 

ately  etly  itely  otely  utely 

tly 

antly  ently  ointly  untly 

ntly 

andly  endly  ondly  oundly 

ndly 

astly  estly  ostly  istly  ustly 

stly 

asly  esly  osly  isly  usly 

sly 

ave  ive  ieve  eive  eave  ove  oove 

V 

tave  tiva  tove 

tv 

trave  trieve  trive 

trv 

ian  ion  ien 

yn 

fal  fel  fil  fol  ful 

fl 

atty  etty  ity  otty  utty 

ty 

ax  ex  ix  ics  ox  ocks  ux  ucs 

X 

rass  ress  rise  rose  ruse 

rs 

san  sane  sen  sin  sine  sign  son  sun 

sn 

82  *  ECLECTIC  SHORT-HAKD. 

same  som  sum  sm 

self  si 

ship  shp 

ness  ns 

pie  ble  pel  bel  pi 

rier  i-ior  yr 

rious  rys 

ried  riet  rd  t  ryd 

hood  hd 

tied  td 

The  shn  tick, — The  terminations  tion,  sion,  don,  dan, 
sian,  in  short  words,  are  expressed  by  a  minute  backward 
tick,  forming  an  angle  with  the  letter  to  which  it  is  at- 
tached. Tlie  tick  also  represents  tious,  dous,  sious,  ceous, 
and  Hal,  dal,  sial,  shall,  the  context  being  a  sufficient  guide 
in  determining  whether  tion,  tious,  or  tial,  is  intended  by 
the  tick.     Any  following  letter  may  be  attached  to  it. 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 


-Key.— Nation,  notion,  motion,  mansion,  mention,  fash- 
ion, caution,  cautious,  passion,  portion,  partial,  illusion, 
intention,  national,  nationally,  nations,  nationals,  fashions, 
fashioned,  fashionable. 

Signs  wriften   across  preceding  characters.— The 

following  terminations  are  expressed  by  writing  the  termi- 
nal sign  across  the  preceding  character: 


SYLLABIFICATION. 


83 


Terminations. 

Signs. 

tive  tively  tiveness 

V  downward 

sive  sively  siveness 

V  upwai'd 

ty  tily  tiness 

t  tick 

sy  sily  siness 

s  tick 

sty  stily  stiness 

st  ticks 

try  tary  tery  tiry  tory  tury 

t  tick  shaded 

stry  stary  stery  stiry  story  stury 

st  ticks  shaded 

age 

a 

ology  oloffical  oloaist  ologion 

0 

graph      graphic     graphical      graphically 

graphing  g 

logue   '  1 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 


•-=^ 


Key, — Restive,  attentive,  inventive,  motive,  missive, 
abusive,  aggressive,  illusive,  city,  mighty,  beauty,  duty, 
fussy,  newsy,  dressy,  dozy,  hazy,  pasty,  yeasty,  dusty,  modes- 
ty, monetary,  inventory,  wintry,  pastry,  mystery,  dentistry, 
voyage,  manage,  vintage,  adage,  dotage,  theology,  geology, 
biology,  physiology,  telegraph,  caligraph,  lithograph,  deca- 
logue, epilogue,  dialogue. 

Detached  Signs.— "YhQYQ.  is  a  class  of  terminations,  be- 
ginning with  a  consonant  and  a  vowel,  as  ha,  be,  hi,  bu,  ca, 


84 


ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 


ce,  ci,  CO,  cu,  da,  de,  di,  do,  du,  fa,  fe,  fi,  fo,  fia,  fie,  fii,  fiu, 
etc.,  etc.,  terminating  with  tid.  Us,  ting,  tive,  tion,  tious,  tial, 
timent,  making,  bate,  bated,  bates,  bative,  bating,  cate,  cates, 
cated,  eating,  cative,  cation,  cations,  catial,  catement,  date, 
dates,  dated,  dating,  dation,  datious,  datial,  dite,  dites,  dited, 
ditive,  diting,  dition,  ditious,  ditial,flate,fiates,fiated,flating, 
fiation. 

These  terminations  occur  in  such  words  as  do-nate,  do- 
nated, do-nates,  do-nating,  do-nation,  pro-bate,  pro-bated, 
pro-bation,  se-dition,  se-ditious,  con-dition,  pro-fusion,  pro- 
fession, ren-dition,  in-action,  re-duction,  e-lection,  o-vation, 
e-motion,  inter-ruption,  col-lection,  in-flection,  in-fraction, 
con-stitution,  in-stitution,  per-suasion,  sit-uation,  ti*it-ura- 
tion,  evac-uation,  perpet-uation. 

All  such  terminations  are  expressed  by  writing  the  ini- 
tial letter  or  letters  of  the  termination  under  or  near  the 
last  character  of  the  preceding  syllable,  as  in  the  following 
writing. 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 


SYLLABIFICATION.  85 

Jffey.— 0-mission,  e-vasion,  o-ration,  e-dition,  o-vation, 
a-doption,  e-rosion,  e-rection,  e-motion,  e-lection,  e-la- 
tion,  e-jected,  do-nation,  se-dition,  ef-fusion,  in-fusion, 
in-action,  in-cautious,  in-duction,  al-lusion,  il-lusion,  ad- 
dition, oc-casion,  ac-cession,  ag-gression,  abro-gation,  pro- 
batipn,  pro-fession,  per-fection,  con-elusion,  con-cretion,  se- 
duction, in-duction,  in-ception,  de-scription,  pro-scription. 
sub-sci'iption,  pi*o-jection,  inter-ruption,  cor-ruption,  in- 
flation, in-vention,  in-tention,  in-forraation,  ab-duction, 
con-summation,  con-sumption,  per-suasion,  evac-uation,  sit- 
uation, in-tuition,  aggre-gation,  prepa-ration,  popu-lation, 
pene-tration,  con-stitution,  in-stitution,  des-titution,  anni- 
hilation, abro-gation,  specu-lation,  specifi-cation. 

LIST    OF    TERMINATIONS. 

The  following  is  a  full,  list  of  the  terminations  which 
are  represented  by  writing  their  initial  letter  detached  from 
and  underneath,  or  near  the  preceding  character: 

Sign.  Terminatiotis. 

a  —  act,  acts,  acted,  acting,  action,  actile,  active,  actious, 

actment. 
a  —  apt,  apts,  apted,  apting,  aptation,  aptile,  aptive,  apt- 

ment,  aptable,  ation. 
e  —  ect,  ects,  ected,  ecting,  ection,  ectile,  ective,  ectment, 
e  —  ept,  epts,  epted,  epting,  eption,  eptive,  eptibly,  eptedly. 
i  —  ict,  icts,  icted,  icting,  iction  ictive,  ictious,  ictment. 
i  —  ipt,  ipts,  ipted,  ipting,  iption,  iptive,  ition. 
0  —  oct,  octs,  octed,  octing,  oction,  octile,  octious,  octment. 
0  —  opt,  opts,  opted,  opting,  option,  optive. 
u  —  uct,  nets,  ucted,  ucting,  uction,  uctive,  uctile,  uctment. 
u  —  upt,    upts,    upted,    upting,    uption,    uptive,    uptebly, 

uptedly. 


86  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

b  —  bate,  bates,  bated,  bating,  bation,  batious,  batial,  bate- 

ment. 
b  —  bite,  bites,  bited,  biting,  bition,  bitious. 
b  —  bute,  butes,  buted,  buting,  bution,    butious,   butiate, 

butement. 
hi'  —  brade,  brades,  braded,  brading,  brasion, 
c  —  cate,  cates,  cated,  eating,  cation,  cations,  cational,  cative. 
cr  —  crate,  crates,  crated,  crating,  cration. 
c  —  cute,  cutes,  cuted,  cuting,  cution,  cutive,  cutional,  cute- 
men  t. 
d  —  elude,  eludes,  eluded,  eluding,  elusion,  elusive,  clusive- 

ness. 
s  —  cede,  cedes,  ceded,  ceeding,  cession,  cessive,  cessment, 
s-^cite,  cites,  cited,  citing,  citation,  citement. 
d  —  date,  dates,  dated,  dating,  dation,  dacious,  dicament. 
d  —  dite,  dites,  dited,  diting,  dition,  ditious,  ditement. 
d  —  dote,  dotes,  doted,  doting. 

/ — feit,  feits,  feited,  feiting,  feiture,  fession,  fessional. 
/■ — fute,  futes,  futed,  futing,  fusion,  fusional. 
fl  —  flate,   flates,   flated,   flating,    flation,  flative,   flatement, 

flationists. 
</  —  gate,  gates,  gated,  gating,  gation,  gatious,  gational. 
;/r  —  grate,  grates,  grated,  grating,  gration. 
Jd  —  hilate,  hilates,  hilating,  hilation. 
./' — jeet.  jects,  jected.  jecting,  jection,  jectionable,  jective, 

jectnient. 
/  —  late,  lates,   lated,  lating,  lation,  lative,  latial,  lacious, 

latenient. 
/  —  lide,  lides.  lided,  liding,  lision,  licious. 
/  —  ludc,  ludes,  luded,  hiding,  lusion. 
iji  —  mate,  mates,  mated,  mating,  mation,  macious. 


SYLLABIFICATION.  87 

m  —  mit,  mits,  mitted,  miting,  mission,  missive,  mitment 

m  —  mute,  mutes,  muted,  muting, 

n  —  nate,   nates,    nated,    nating,    native,    nation,    naceous, 

natial. 
n  —  nite,  nites,  nited,  niting,  nition,  nitious,  nitial. 
M  —  nute,  nutes,  nuted,  nuting,  nutive,  nutition,  nuticious. 
p  —  pate,  pated,  pates,  pating,  pation,  pative. 
p  —  pet,  petes,  peted,  peting,  petion,  pecious. 
p  —  pute,  putes,  puted,  puting,  putation,  putement. 
pl  —  plate,  plates,  plated,  plating,  plation,  plative. 
pl  —  plete,  pletes,  pleting,  pleted,  pletion. 
pl  —  plode,  plodes,  ploded,  ploding,  plosion,  ploration. 
qu  —  quate,  quated,  quatious. 
'r  —  rate,  I'ates,  rated,  i-ating,  ration,  rative. 
r — ride,  rides,  rided,  riding,  rision,  ricious. 
r  —  rode,  rodes,  roded,  roding,  rosion,  rosive. 
s  —  sate,  sates,  sated,  sating,  sation. 
s  —  site,  sites,  sited,  siting,  sition,  sitious,  sitional. 
si  —  sulate,  sulates,  sulated,  sulating,  sulation,  sulative. 
t  —  tate,  tates,  tated,  tating,  tation,  tative,  tatious,  tatial. 
tr  —  trate,  trates,  trated,  trating,  tration,  trative. 
t  —  tute,  tutes,  tuted,  tuting,  tution,  tutional,  tutive. 
til- — tend,  tends,  tended,  tending,  tention,  tentional,  ten- 

tious. 
u  or  w  —  uate,  uates,  uated,  uating,  uation,  uition,  uitional. 
sw  —  suade,    suades,    suaded,    suading,   suasive,   suasively, 

suasiveness. 
V  —  vade,    vades,   vaded,   vading,  vasion,   vasive,   vasively, 

vasiveness. 
V — vate,  vates,  vated,  vating,  vation. 
vn  —  vent,  vents,  vented,  venting,  vention,  ventional. 


88  *  ECLECTIC    SHORT-HAND. 

sc  —  script,  scription,  scriptive,  scriptively. 

sp  —  spicious,  spicion,  spicuous,  spicuity,  spicuously. 

st  —  stitute,  stituted,  stituting,  stitution,  stitutionally. 

It  may  possibly  appear  to  the  learner  that  one  sign  can- 
not safely  represent  so  many  terminations,  and  occasionally 
a  word  may  seem  to  be  obscure,  but  study  of  the  context 
will  soon  decide  it. 

PRINCIPLE    IX. 

TJie  omission  of  initial  letters  or  syllables. — This 
principle  may  be  safely  applied  in  many  cases,  adding  much 
to  brevity. 

Ac,  ag,  oc— May  be  omitted  from  such  words  as  accord, 
according,  accordingly,  accuse,  acknowledge,  aggressive,  ag- 
gravate, acquired,  occur,  occasion. 

^/.— May  be  omitted  from  such  words  as  affirm,  affix, 
afraid,  afford,  affirmation. 

Al» — May  be  omitted  from  such  words  as  allow,  allusion, 
almost,  although. 

Cofn,  con.— May  be  omitted  from  such  words  as  con- 
fuse, confer,  confess,  compose,  compute,  comprise,  contempt, 
congregation. 

En,  em. —  May  be  omitted  from  such  words  as  enjoy, 
enjoys,  enjoying,  enjoin,  encase,  enclose,  employ,  embolden, 
entice,  engrave. 

Ex. —  In  words  beginning  with  ex  omit  e,  and  write  x  on 
the  position  of  its  following  vowel. 

jH. — This  letter  may  be  safely  omitted  from  such  words 
as  lias,  his,  him,  hid,  hit,  have,  house,  human,  heaven,  etc., 
writing  as,  is,  im,  id,  it,  av,  ous,  umn,  evn. 


SYLLABIFICATION.  89 

In,  im.—  Ka.y  be  omitted  from  such  words  as  imply, 
implied,  improve,  improved,  increased,  ingulfed,  inclosed. 

Be, —  May  be  omitted  from  such  words  as  reversed,  re- 
viewed, revived,  revoked,  report,  reported,  reposed,  replied, 
reply,  replying,  repealed,  required. 

Ing,  ings,  ingly,  inging,  inger,  ngor» — The  termina- 
tion ing  is  represented  by  a  dot  placed  near  the  end  of  the  pre- 
ceding character.  Two  dots  are  used  for  inging ;  for  ings,  «  is 
placed  instead  of  the  dot;  for  ingly,  minute  I  is  used,  and  for 
inger  or  ngor  a  liea%y  dot  is  written. 

The  dot  is  also  used  in  the  same  way  for  ng  and  thing,  and  «  is 
used  for  th  ings. 


^^np- 


,.0^ 


^ 


Key. —  Saying,  knowing,  going,  fearing,  cooling,  trying, 
knowingly,  feelingly,  singing,  bringing,  singer,  clangor,  sayings, 
meetings,  endings,  singers,  all  things,  these  things,  some  things, 
few  things,  liow  things,  what  things,  have  things,  big  things, 
nothing,  soothingly. 


CHAPTER  IV. 


WORD  SIGNS  AND  PHRASE  WRITING. 

A  word  sign  is  an  arbitrary  representation  of  a  word, 
usually  consisting  of  one  or  more  prominent  letters  of  it. 
A  sign  should  be  so  suggestive  of  its  word  as  to  be  easily 
remembei-ed. 

Few,  and  those  of  the  simplest  character,  are  used  in 
this  system,  because  most  words  are  so  simply  and  com- 
pletely written  on  its  general  principles  as  to  make  signs 
unnecessary.  The  signs  used  are  chiefly  for  the  purpose  of 
phrase  writing. 

The  dot  is  used  on  a  position  for  ah;  on  e  position  for 
the,  thee;  on  i  position  for  /,  aye,  eye;  on  o  position  for  0, 
oh,  owe.  It  is  also  iised  written  close  to  the  end  of  a  word 
for  ng,  ing,  and  thing.  The  plural,  things,  is  written  by  s, 
in  place  of  the  dot;  the  character  e  is  written  across  the 
line  for  any;  a  across  the  line  makes  an,  and  is  also  used 
for  the  wox'd  a;  h>  is  written  across  the  line  for  tvith;  q  is 
written,  standing  on  the  line,  for  question;  v  is  written, 
standing  on  the  line,  for  have;  o  is  written,  standing  on  the 
line,  for  one;  a  heavy  h  is  used  for  business;  c  and  tv  on  u 
position  for  couhl  and  irouJd. 

Phrase  writing. —  In  speaking,  many  phrases  are 
uttered  in  a  rapid  and  continued  tone,  as  if  by  a  single  im- 
pulse of  the  voice.  The  stenographer  often  writes  such 
phrases  without  lifting  the  pen,  running  words  together  in 


WORD   SIGNS   AND   PHRASE   WRITING. 


91 


imitation  of  the  speaker.  The  saving  of  movements,  and 
lifting  of  the  pen  from  word  to  word,  is  a  strong  argument 
in  favor  of  the  practice,  besides  well  conceived  phrases  are 
perfectly  legible.  In  this  system  phrases  are  constructed  in 
three  different  methods. 

First  method, — There  are  many  phrases  of  two  words, 
in  which  the  last  word  is  a,  the,  I  or  you.  Many  of  these 
are  written  by  adopting  the  character  which  writes  the 
first  word,  as  a  sign,  and  writing  it  on  position  for  the 
second  word,  as  to  a;  t  is  used  for  to  and  written  on  first 
position  to  express  a;  by  a,  b  is  used  for  by,  and  written  on 
first  position  for  by  a,  on  second  position  for  by  the,  on  fifth 
position  for  by  you.  The  words  which  are  represented  by 
signs  and  used  in  this  method  of  phrase  writing  are: 


Words. 


do 

by 
for 
if 

from 

have 

what 

in 

and 

now 

know 


Signs. 

i 

d 

b 

fr 

f 

frm 

V 

wh 

i  minute 

a  minute 

n 

n 


Words. 

Signs. 

but 

bt  heavy 

as 

z 

all 

I 

at 

a  upward 

are 

a  shaded 

on 

0  downward 

of 

0  upward 

is 

i  downward 

or 

0  shaded 

not 

nt 

upon 

un 

that 

tht 

92 


ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 
ILLU8TRATI0KS. 


Key.— To,  to  the,  to  a,  to  you,  do,  do  I,  do  the,  do  a,  do 
you,  by,  by  the,  by  a,  by  you,  but,  but  I,  but  you,  but  the,  but 
a,  for,  for  I,  for  the,  for  a,  for  you,  from,  from  the,  from  a, 
from  you,  if,  if  I,  if  the,  if  a,  if  you,  have,  have  I,  have  the, 
have  a,  have  you,  of,  of  the,  of  a,  of  you,  one,  on,  on  the, 
on  a,  on  you,  what,  what  a,  what  the,  what  I,  what  you,  in, 
in  the,  in  a.  in  you,  and,  and  the,  and  a,  and  I,  and  you, 
know,  know  the.  know  a,  know  you,  not,  not  I,  not  the,  not 
a,  not  you,  now,  now  I,  now  the,  now  a,  now  you,  as,  as  I, 
as  the,  as  a,  as  you,  all,  all  I,  all  the,  all  a,  all  you,  at,  at 
the,  at  a,  at  you.  are,  are  3'ou,  are  the,  or,  or  the,  or  I,  or  a, 
or  you,  is,  is  the,  is  a,  upon,  upon  the,  upon  you,  so,  so  I,  so 
the,  so  a.  so  you,  that,  that  I,  that  the,  that  a,  that  you,  did, 
did  I,  did  th'.  did  a,  did  you. 


WORD   SIGNS  AND   PHRASE   WRITING.  93 

Second  Method. — There  is  a  class  of  phrases  consisting 
of  three  words,  the  second  of  which  is  a  conjunction,  or 
preposition,  tying  the  others  together.  In  such  phrases  the 
connecting  word  is  omitted,  but  expressed  by  writing  the 
first  and  last  words  in  close  proximity  or  united. 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 


\ 


1^ 


Key.— One  by  one,  day  to  day,  day  by  day,  day  after 
day,  over  and  over,  ever  and  ever,  all  in  all,  each  to  each, 
by  and  by,  better  and  better,  brighter  and  brighter,  higher 
and  higher,  broader  and  broader,  deeper  and  deeper,  less 
and  less,  hour  by  hour,  out  and  out,  more  and  more,  nearer 
and  nearer,  forever  and  ever,  lower  and  lower,  time  to 
time,  wider  and  wider,  again  and  again,  farther  and  farther. 

TJiircl  Method. — This  method  consists  in  attaching  one 
word  sign  to  another.  Several  words  may  be  thus  repre- 
sented connectedly,  and  be  even  more  legible  than  when 
written  disconnectedly. 

For  this  method  of  phrase  writing  a  series  of  word  signs 
are  used  for  the  common  words  which  they  express  when 
written  on  the  several  positions;  thus,  s  written  on  the 
various  positions,  writes  sai/,  see,  sigh,  so,  sue,  of  which 
all  but  sigh  are  frequent  words,  and  hence  valuable  in 
phrase  writing,  and  therefore  s  is  used  as  a  phrasing  sign 
for  say,  see,  so,  sue.     In  the   following   list   of  signs   the 


94 


ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 


Roman   characters  are  used  to  represent  the  short-hand 
characters. 

SIGNS    AND    PHRASE-WORDS. 


a  downwards 

as,  an 

P 

pay 

a  upwards 

a,  at 

q 

question 

b 

be,  by 

r 

are,  or,  her 

c 

could 

8 

say,  see,  sue,  so 

d 

day,  due, 

,  do,  die 

t 

to 

6 

any,  eacl 

I,  he 

u  vertical  us,  up 

f 

if,  few- 

u  slant 

you 

g 

go 

V 

have 

h 

he,  how 

w 

with,  we,  way, 

i  downwards 

is,  in 

would 

i  upwards 

I,  it 

y 

ye,  you 

J 

just 

z 

as 

1 

all,  will, 

well 

ch 

such,  much 

ra 

may,  me. 

my 

sh 

should 

n 

now,  no, 

new 

th 

the,  they,  though 

0  downwards 

on,  own, 

one 

wh 

what,  who,  why 

0  upwards        of,  off 

The  learner  can  easily  and  intelligently  enlarge  this  list 
by  using  the  lengthened  and  enlai'ged,  the  shortened  and 
the  minute  characters,  and  the  shaded  characters,  for  the 
words  which  they  suggest;  thus,  minute  a  is  an,  shortened 
a  is  at,  add,  had;  minute  i  is  in,  him,  shortened  i  is  it, 
minute  b  is  been,  short  b  is  but,  bad,  bid,  shortened  th  is 
that,  tliought,  minute  th  is  than,  then,  thin,  them,  shaded  th 
is  tltere,  their,  enlarged  p  is  paid,  pjut,  enlarged  g  is  get, 
got.  good,  and  shaded  it  is  great,  lengthened  c  is  can,  came, 
come,  lengthened  s  is  same,  seem,  seen,  some,  lengthened  tv 
is  win.  icon,  minute  n  is  name,  none,  shortened  n  is  not,  and; 


WORD   SIGNS  AND   PHRASE   WEITING. 


^- 


$  tick  is  used  for  is,  was,  as,  his.  These  are  suggestions 
which  the  intelligent  student  will  take  pleasure  and  find 
profit  in  pursuing  to  a  gi-eater  extent. 

SIMPLE    PHRASES. 

The  following  phrases  should  be  written  without  lifting 
..    the  pen,  each  word  being  represented  by  its  sign; 
»/  Can  you  come  soon?     Will  you  give  me  your  name? 

There  is  no  one  there.  So  it  is  now.  Do  you  want 
me  to-day?  If  you  can  give,  will  you?  How  much  have 
you  sent  them?  My  dear  sir.  Give  me  time.  In  my  day. 
When  can  you  pay  me?  Did  you  send  him?  I  will  be 
there  soon.  It  will  be  near  me.  If  it  is  a  good  day.  I 
have  no  time  for  it  now.  I  can't  put  it  on  now.  No  one 
can.  Some  one  will  be  there.  One  of  them.  One  of  you. 
In  a  few  days.  In  the  beginning.  As  you  can  see.  I  wish 
you  would  do  so. 

The  foregoing  are  merely  specimens  of  natural  phrase 
writing  which  can  be  easily  multiplied  ad  libitum. 

COMMON    LEGAL    PHRASES. 

1.  What  is  your  name,  age,  and  occupation?  2.  Where 
do  you  reside?  3.  How  long  have  you  resided  there?  4. 
Do  you  know  the  plaintiff  in  this  action?  5.  How  long 
have  you  known  him?  6.  Please  state  to  the  court.  7. 
You  may  state  to  the  jury.  8.  Do  you  mean  to  say  that? 
9.  Are  you  a  party  to  this  suit?  10.  In  your  direct  exam- 
ination you  state.  11.  Describe  what  took  place  there.  12. 
Did  you  not  state  in  your  examination  in  chief?  13.  To 
the  best  of  your  knowledge  and  belief,  then.  14.  You  may 
now  state  to  the  jury.  15.  You  have  heard  the  witness  for 
the  plaintiff  state.  16.  Ai-e  you  as  positive  of  this  as  of 
anything  you  have  testified  to?     17.  As  a  matter  of  fact 


96 


ECLECTIC    SHOET-HAKD 


did  you  not?  18.  Then  you  were  mistaken  when  you  said. 
19.  Are  you  willing  to  swear  this  was  the  fact?  20.  Were 
you  a  witness  on  the  former  trial  of  this  case?  21.  What 
relation,  if  any,  do  you  sustain  to  the  defendant?  22.  Then 
state,  to  the  best  of  your  recollection.  23.  State  what  you 
know,  and  not  what  you  hear.  24.  Please  state  the  conver- 
sation as  near  as  you  can,  25.  Did  you  have  any  conversa- 
tion with  the  defendant  as  to  what  you  was,  or  was  not,  to 
testify  to?  26.  From  whom  did  you  first  learn  that  you 
would  be  called  as  a  witness  in  this  case? 

KEY. 
/_^-^ -2^^:^     J ^^ 


CORRESPOs'DEXCE     PHRASES. 

1.  In  reply  to  yours  of  the 2.  In  reply  to  your 

favor  of  the 3.   We  have  yours  of 4.  We  have 

your  favor  of 5.   We  have  your  favor  of  late  date.     6. 


^ 

^ 


o 


WORD   SIGNS  AKD   PHRASE  WRITING. 


97 


We  are  in  receipt  of  yours.  7.  We  are  in  receipt  of  yonr 
favor.  8.  We  are  in  receipt  of  your  favor  inclosing  draft 
for 9.  We  ai-e  in  receipt  of  yours  inclosing  check  for 

10.  Yours  of 11.  Your  favor  of 12.  Your 

favor  received.  13.  Your  favor  at  hand.  14.  Your  favor 
duly  received,  and  contents  noted.      15.  Inclosed  please  find 

16,  Inclosed  we  hand  you 17.  For  which  please 

accept  our  thanks.  18.  Your  order  solicited.  19.  We 
should  be  pleased  to  receive  your  order.  20.  We  would  be 
pleased  to  be  favored  with  your  orders.  21.  Thanking  you  for 
past  favors.  22.  Awaiting  an  early  reply,  we  remain.  23. 
Please  give  this  pi-orapt  attention.  24.  Please  enter  our 
order  and  ship  at  your  earliest  convenience.  25.  Prompt 
attention  will  greatly  oblige.  26.  Hoping  to  hear  from  you 
soon,  we  remain.  27.  Yours  respectfully.  28.  Yours  very 
truly.     29.  Yours  truly. 

KEY. 


98  *  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

GENERAL    ILLUSTRATIVE    PHRASES. 

1.  As  if  there  had  been.  2.  As  far  as  you  can.  3.  In 
the  meantime.  4.  Because  it  might  not  be  well.  5.  Do 
you  mean  to  say  so?  6.  Gentlemen  of  the  jury.  7.  It  can- 
not be  true.  8.  Go  on  and  state  to  the  jury.  9.  State  as 
near  as  you  can.  10.  I  will  ask  you  to  state  to  the  jury. 
11.  Have  you  or  not  paid  that  note?  12.  Do  you  say  it  is 
paid?  13.  When  did  you  pay  it?  14.  How  do  you  know 
that?  15.  It  is  as  well  so.  16.  As  soon  as  it  is  received. 
17.  What  do  you  think  of  this?  18.  Do  the  best  you  can. 
19.  We  may  be  sure  of  it.  20.  Do  you  not  think  it  will  be 
well?  21.  To  say  I  will.  22.  If  you  are  sure  of  it.  23. 
No  time.  24.  For  the  very  best  of  reasons.  25.  In  the 
meantime.  26.  How  soon  will  your  work  be  ready?  27. 
So  you  say.  28.  How  much  can  you  get?  29.  How  much 
have  you  paid?  30.  How  long  will  you  remain?  31.  He 
will  call  on  you.  32.  At  the  same  time.  33.  In  a  day  or 
two.  34.  In  a  few  days.  35.  Not  far  from  this.  36.  It 
may  be  seen.  37.  It  may  not  be  for  the  best.  38.  For 
some  reasons.  39.  In  the  present  state  of  things.  40.  Let 
me  remind  you  that.  41.  This  was  before  election.  42.  It 
may  be.  43.  So  far  from  this  being  the  case.  44,  Not  to- 
day. 45.  It  is  out  of  the  question.  46.  As  it  would  be. 
47.  We  will  make  by  one  of  the.  48.  It  is  said  to  be.  49. 
As  the  case  may  be.  50.  It  may  not  be.  51.  In  the  same 
manner  as  if.  52.  Someone  has  said.  53.  This  of  all  the 
questions.  54.  They  are  capable.  55.  For  the  time  has 
been. 


WORD   SIGNS   AND    PHRASE   WRITING. 


99 


KEY. 


100 


ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 


ABBREVIATIONS. 
Some  of  the  abbreviations  in  common  use  in  English 
writing  are  useful  in  short-hand,  and  are  expressed  by  short- 
hand characters  as  they  are  in  long-hand;  as  Mass.,  for 
Massachusetts,  is  written  by  ilf  on  a  position,  with  ss  added. 
The  abbreviations  for  the  states  are  especially  valuable. 
They  should  generally  be  capitalized.  The  period  after 
each  may  be  omitted.  A  full  list  of  abbreviations  is  given 
in  dictionary.  Some  words  for  which  abbreviations  are  in 
use  are  more  briefly  and  fully  written  out  by  short-hand 
principles. 

ABBREVIATIONS    FOR    THE    TJXITED    STATES. 


Ala. 

Alabama. 

Mo. 

Missouri. 

ArJc. 

Arkansas. 

Mon. 

Montana. 

Cal. 

California. 

N.  C. 

North  Carolina. 

Ct. 

Connecticut. 

Neh. 

Nebraska. 

D.C. 

District  of  Cohunbia. 

N.  II. 

New  Hampshire. 

Del. 

Delaware. 

N.  J. 

New  Jersey. 

D.  T. 

Dakota  Territory. 

N.  M. 

New  Mexico. 

Fla. 

Florida. 

N.  Y. 

New  York. 

Ga. 

Georgia. 

0. 

Ohio. 

la. 

Iowa. 

Or. 

Oregon. 

Ida. 

Idaho. 

Pa. 

Pennsylvania. 

111. 

Illinois. 

R.L 

Rhode  Island. 

Ind. 

Indiana. 

S.  C. 

South  Carolina. 

Ind.  T. 

Indian  Territory. 

Tenn. 

Tennessee. 

Kan. 

Kansas. 

Tex. 

Texas. 

Ky. 

Kentucky. 

U.  S. 

United  States. 

La. 

Louisiana. 

U.  T. 

Utah  Territory. 

L.  I. 

Long  Island. 

Va. 

Virginia. 

Mass. 

Massachusetts. 

Vf. 

Vermont. 

Md. 

Maryland. 

Wis. 

Wisconsin. 

Me. 

Maine. 

W.  T. 

Washington  Territory. 

Mich. 

Michigan. 

W.  Va. 

West  Virginia. 

Miss. 

Mississippi. 

COMMON   ABBREVIATIONS. 


101 


SYNOPSIS  OF  THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  THE  SYSTEM. 

The  following  classification  will  serve  for  reference,  and 
enable  the  pupil  also  to  fix  in  mind  the  different  principles 

and  contractions: 

^Alphabet,  represented  by  char- 
acters which  are  simple, 
light,  sloped,  and  horizontal, 
both  vowels  and  consonants 
connective. 
Alphabet  represented  by  posi- 

FUNDAMENTALS  ■{         tionS. 

Abbreviated  Spelling,  based  on 
the  rules  of  the  Spelling  Re- 
form Association. 

Syllabification  —  The  union  of 
syllabic  outlines,  embraced 
in  several  principles,  viz. : 

Principle  I.  Writing  consonant  characters  in  such  a  man- 
ner as  to  express  a  following  vowel. 

"  XL  Writing  vowel  characters  in  such  a  manner  as 
to  express  a  following  consonant. 

"  III.  Lengthening  the  long  characters  and  enlarging 
the  surface  characters  to  express  following 
letters. 

"  IV.  Shortening  short  characters  and  diminishing 
surface  characters  to  express  following 
letters. 

"  V.  Unified  characters  to  express  coalescent  conso- 
nants, so  written  as  to  express  a  following 
vowel. 


102         •  ECLECTIC    SHORT-HAND. 

Principle  VI.  Unified  uncoalescent  consonants,  so  written 
as  to  express  an  intermediate  vowel. 
"      VII.  Representation  of  syllables   by  their  conso- 
nants. 
"     VIII.  Representation  of  syllables  in  prefixes  and 
suffixes  by  arbitraries. 
Word  signs  and  phrase  writing. 
"        IX.  The  omission  of  initial  letters  and  syllables. 
Common  abbreviations. 

ADDITIONAL  ILLUSTRATIONS. 

Any  character,  except  a  minute  one,  may  be  retraced  to  add 
/or  V,  and  the  retracing  shaded  to  add  also  a  following  r.  The 
retracing  may  l)e  treated  like  a  surface  character,  being  made 
minute  to  express  following  I,  or  lengthened  to  express  following 
t  or  d.     It  is  not  best  to  retrace  a  surface  character. 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 


Key, —  Save,     cave,     move,     moved,     cavil,     caved,     several, 
severed,  cover,  covered,  novel,  never. 

The  letter  I  may  be  superenlarged  to  add  a  second  t  or  d. 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 


Key, —  Lighted,  laded,  loaded,  wilted,  salted,  ,melted,  molted, 
exalted,  vaulted,   folded,  kilted. 

Enlarged  initial  /(  i.->  not  shaded  to  add  r.  as  in  hard,  heard, 
hoard,  because  tlio  sliading  liecomes  the  initial  letter  (r),  and  makes 
the  enlarged  It  eh,  instead  of  hi  or  hd. 

lI.l.rsTKATIONS. 

Key.  —  Kash.  rcacli,  ricli,  roach,  rush,  heart,  hard,  heard, 
hoard,  hearth,  Mretehed,  reaches,  riches  righteous,  righteousness. 


^•T'^I-^t^' 


CHAPTER  V. 


READING  AND  WRITING  EXERCISES. 

THE    BAT    AND    THE    WEASELS. 


-& 


j:^. 


y. 


j- 


^,^ 


7^=V 


'^_^'V""" 


•v. 


4^ 


^/a_i" ^'--o^ 


7»^ 


•7--^==.^-^ 


A    MISCHIEVOUS    DOG. 


'^ 


-f-^-^ 


Y- 


-o >■ 


-v-e^ 


T 


^=-^ 


-^-^ 


-7*^^ 


=^_0f 


T^ 


104 


ECLECTIC   SHOfiT-HAND. 


THE    PEASANT    AND   THE    APPLE    TREE. 


THE    WOLF    AND    THE    LAMB. 


READING   AND    WRITING   EXERCISES. 


105 


THE    THIRSTY    PIGEON. 


•>-  '  "--^  "'^ 


THE  THIEVES  AND  THE  COCK. 


^^7= -f-f^^z-/- 


-f— 


THE    LION    AND    THE    HAKE. 


-fZ^ 


r^~~j~_ 


-/- 


-f- 


T-r 


-/^ 


^ 


.     Q 


a 


-f-r 


^- 


T 


"Z7" 


^ 


a:> 


/" 


-i^ 


106 


ECLECTIC   SHOKT-HAND. 


WORDS    TO    BOYS. 


HEADING   AND   WRITING    EXERCISES. 
WORDS  TO  BOYS  —  Continued. 


107 


-^-^^ 


^ 


-v^ 


.-^ 


INDUSTRT. 


-rT" 


^^ 


-/"^^--^^^-^^-^^^-^^z::^ 


-J^- 


~T 


108 


ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 


CHAPTER  VI. 


SHORT-HAND  VOCABULARY. 

Having  laid  before  the  pupil  all  the  principles  of  the 
system,  we  devote  this  chapter  to  the  writing  of  various 
classes  of  words,  the  more  fully  to  develop  the  application 
of  principles.  The  words  as  classified  will  arrest  the  atten- 
tion of  the  thoughtful  pupil,  and  should  be  written,  re- 
written, read  and  reread  until  absolutely  familiar. 

LIST    OF    CONJTJKCTIONS. 

And  also  although  as  because  but  consequently  either 
even  except  for  if  lest  moreover  nor  notwithstanding  or 
provided  save  seeing  since  so  still  than  then  though  there- 
fore unless  whether  whereas  wherefore  yet 

CONJUNCTIONS    WRITTEN. 

I- 


IDS 


110 


ECLECTIC    SHORT-HAND. 


CONJUNCTIVE    PHBASES. 

As  if,  as  though,  as  well  as,  as  soon  as,  as  far  as,  as 
many  as,  as  much  as,  except  that,  for  as  much  as,  in  so 
much  that,  but  also,  but  likewise,  notwithstanding  that, 
not  only. 

CONJUNCTIVE   PHBASES    WBITTEN. 


J- {        /f-^    { 


^^ 


jl 


^ 


^ 


TT 


-^ 


T 


TT 


^T 


LIST    OF    PBEPOSITIONS. 


A  at  aboard  above  about,  according  to,  across,  after 
against  along  amid  amidst  among  amongst  around,  as  to, 
athwart  before  behind  below  beneath  beside  besides  be- 
tween betwixt  beyond  but  by  concei'ning  down  during  ere 
except  for  from  in  into  notwithstanding  of  off  on,  out  of, 
over  past  round  save  since  still  until  through  throughout 
to  toward  towards  under  unto  up  upon  with  within  without 


PBEPOSITIONS    WRITTEN. 


SHORT-HAND    VOCABULARY.  Ill 


LIST    OF    PRONOUNS. 


I  thou  he  she  it  myself  thyself  himself  herself  itself 
who  whoever  whosoever  which  whichever  whichsoever 
what  whatever  whatsoever  that 


PRONOUNS    WRITTEN. 


DEFECTIVE    AND    AUXILIARY    VERBS. 

Beware  can  may  must  ought  shall  will  quoth 
Do  be  have  shall  will  may  can  must 

DEFECTIVE    AND    AUXILIARY    VERBS    WRITTEN. 


LIST    OF    IRREGULAR    VERBS. 

Abide  be  bear  beat  begin  bend  beseech  bid  bind  bite 
bleed  blow  break  breed  bring  build  burst  buy  cast  catch 
chide  choose  cleave  cling  clothe  come  cost  crow  creep  cut 
dai-e  deal  dig  do  draw  di-eam  drive  drink  dwell  eat  fall 
feed  feel  find  fight  flee  fling  fly  forsake  freeze  get  gild 
gird  give  go  gave  grind  grow  hang  have  hear  heave  hew 
hide  hit  hold  hurt  keep  kneel  knit  know  lade  lay  lean 
leave  lend  let  lie  light  lose  make  mean  meet  mow  pay 
put  quit  read  reave  rend  rid  ride  ring  rise  rive  run  saw 
say  see  seek  seethe  sell  send  set  shake  share  shear  shed 
shine  shoe  show  shoot  shut  shred  shrink  sing  sink  sit  slay 
sleep  slide  sling  slink  slit  smite  sow  speak   speed  spend 


112   ; 


ECLECTIC    SHORT-HAND. 


spill  spin  spit  split  spread  spring  stand  steal  stick  sting 
stride  strike  string  strive  strow  swear  sweat  sweep  swell 
swim  swing  take  teach  tear  tell  think  thrive  throw  thrust 
thread  wake  wear  weave  weep  win  wind  wont  work  wing 
Wright 

IBREQULAR    VERBS    WRITTEN. 


^i/^  {y  o'  ^ c — ^ 


fy  (y-         o 


a  o 


^  ^. 


y 


o 


^"-^ 


-^ 


/? 


~,p 


s> 


'y 


-e  -^ 


'^ — 7- 


-^-:^=^=^— ^^ 


SHORT-HAND   VOCABULARY. 


113 


ONE    HUNDRED    WORDS,   SAID    TO    COMPRISE    ONE-HALF    OF 
SPOKEN    AND    WRITTEN    ENGLISH. 

The  and  of  to  in  a  that  is  for  it  he  with  be  are  but 
I  all  by  not  or  as  thy  from  have  at  they  our  we  God 
more  theirs  them  there  my  on  shall  you  will  thou  upon 
word  ye  had  me  no  Lord  us  when  go  heaven  see  great 
other  were  been  0  part  truth  army  ever  full  into  out 
unto  thee  his  which  your  this  him  who  what  an  if  can 
how  life  man  than  may  those  would  has  evei-y  world  do 
one  most  love  now  where  time  give  after  first  like  under 
work  come  yes. 

ONE    HUNDRED   WORDS   WRITTEN. 


ALPHABETIC    LIST    OF    WORDS. 

The  following  list,  consisting  of  words  alphabetically 
arranged,  with  the  written  outlines  on  opposite  pages,  the 
pupil  will  find  very  serviceable  as  key  words  in  suggesting 
brief  outlines  of  all  words. 


114         .  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

Abundant  accepted  acceptable  accession  accident  accu- 
racy accurateness  accordingly  accusation  acquisition  active 
acknowledge  additional  adopt-ed  advance  advanced  ad- 
vancement advantageous  advertise  advertising  affected 
affectionate  affliction  agitate  aggregate  almost  already 
always  along  altogether  amounted  ambitious  America 
American  among  amongst  anniversary  annihilation  anato- 
my anointed  antagonism  annual  annul,  annular  antago- 
nistic antagonist  another  anybody  anything  appear  ap- 
pearance appeared  appears  appearing  appliance  applicant 
application  applied  apply  applicable  applicability  appre- 
hend apprehended  apprehensible  apprehensibility  appre- 
hension apprehensive  approve  approval  arrive  arrival 
arrivals  arrived  arrogance  arsenal  arbitrary  architect 
archangel  archbishop  architecture  architectural  aristocracy 
aristoci'at  aristocratic  arrange  arrest  artificial  artistic 
assistance  ascription  assemble  assembled  assembly  assem- 
bling assure  assurance  assuring  assignment  astonished 
astonishing  astonishment  astronomy  astronomer  astrono- 
mical astounding  attainment  attract  attraction  attractive 
atonement  authority  authoritative  auspiciously  auspicious 
aversion  avocation  avoid  avowed  awake  awakened  awhile 
axiom 

Bachelor  beauty  beautiful  begin  begun  began  begin- 
ning Ixink  bankable  bankrupt  bankruptcy  because  become 
before  behold  beheld  belief  believe  belong  belongs  belong- 
ing body  boldness  bountiful  brethren  brother  business 
bulletin  bureau  buoyant 

Calculable  cabinet  Calvinism  capable  captain  casually 
catholic  Catholicism  certainty  cessation  celestial  celebrate 
celebration  certificate  certify  change 


SHORT-HAND   VOCABULARY. 


116 


A^ 


116         .  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

character  characterize  characterizes  characters  charac- 
teristic characterization  charitable  charity  charter  cheer 
children  childhood  churchyard  circumstance  circumference 
citizen  civilize  clerical  climate  color  commence  commence- 
ments combination  company  compared  comprehended  com- 
prise compose  concern  conclusion  consequence  consequen- 
tial consideration  consisted  consignment  conformable 
constant  conceded  contingency  contradistinction  contra- 
distinguish contributed  contrivings  could  counsel  consul 
council  covenant  combine  commencement  complete  com- 
plexion condition  complain  complicate  compliance  con- 
struction consumed  contained  contraction  contradiction 
contractions  contrived  controlled  conversion  conviction 
convince  convene  corrective  countenance  county  country- 
men covered  created  cured  curious  curved  custom  cyclone 
cynical 

Danger  endanger  darkens  defendant  delinquent  deliv- 
erance denominate  denomination  denounces  derision  deri- 
vation description  descriptive  decision  designation  develop 
difference  difficulty  dignity  direction  directness  disadvan- 
tage disadvantages  disadvantageous  disbelief  discharge 
disclaim  dissever  dissolution  discover  discourse  discourage 
disaff'ection  discrepancy  discriminate  disorganize  disorgan- 
ized disorganization  displeasure  disqualify  disfavor  disease 
dissatisfaction  dissimilar 


SHORT-HAND   VOCABULARY. 


117 


>e^    ^      y 


118        ■  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

distinguish  distinguishable  distinction  divinity  doctor,  dear 
debtor,  dollar  domestic  dominion  donation  downward  dur- 
ing duration  dwell  dwells 

England  eclectic  ecclesiastic  eccentric  eccentricity  em- 
phatic employment  empyric  endanger  endeavor  enlarge 
enthusiasm  enthusiastic  entire  enjoyment  episcopalian  equi- 
noctial equal  equivalent  especially  establishment  eternal 
eternity  evangelical  evening  evidence  everlasting  exchange- 
able exclamation  exclusion  excommunication  excommuni- 
cator  executor  exemplify  exemplification  exhibition  existed 
existence  expanse  expense  expectation  exj5enditure  experi- 
ence explanation  exploration  expression  exquisiteness  ex- 
tempore extemporaneous  extension  extensive  extenuation 
exterior  extract  extracted  extinguish  extraordinary  ex- 
travagant extradition  exult  exuberance  eye-witness 

Fact  failure  family  familiar  fantasm  fantastic  fantasy 
fashion  favorable  feature  financial  first  forever  forgiven 
former  formality  formation  forward  foundation  fraction 
freedom  frequent  from  frugal  fruition  furnished  furniture 
future 

Gain  gallant  galvanic  gangrene  general  generalize 
generation  gentleman-men  glorify  glorious  govern  gov- 
ernor government  gradation  graceful  grander  grandeur 
grandchild  grandchildren  great  greatly 


SHORT-HAND    VOCABULARY. 


119 


.3    ^ . 


Z^ 


T^=- 


j:^ 


jj 


o — u 


(/ — <0         (y — <Q_ 


L/      CP 


120        •  ECLECTIC    SHORT-HAIfD. 

Had  half  happy,  habeas  corpus,  hardened  hath  have, 
have  not,  he  have,  henceforth  hereafter  hesitation  hereto- 
fore hieroglyphical  home  him  homeopathy  hopeful  horrible 
history  hundred  human  humanity  humidity  hurried  hypo- 
critical 

I,  aye,  I  am,  idleness  ignorance  imaginable  imaginary 
immediately  immoral  immorality  immortal  immortality 
immortalize  impassioned  impatience  impatient  impel  im- 
penetrable impenetrability  imponderability  important  im- 
portance impossible  impossibility  impoverished  impractical 
impracticable  impracticability  improbable  improbability 
improvement  imprint  imperishable  impertinent  inactivity 
inauspicious  inartificial  incapable  inalienable  inconsiderable 
inconsiderate  inconsistent  indefatigable  indefinite  indelible 
indescribable  indifferent  indifference  indignity  indemnity 
indemnification  indiscriminate  indispensable  individual  in- 
doctrine  indolent  indicate  industry  industrious  indubitable 
indebted  infinite  infidelity,  infirm  inform,  influence  infer- 
ence information  informal  informality  infringe  inhospita- 
ble inhospitality  inherit  inscribe  inscription  incur  inquire 
insecure  insecurity  insignificant  insignificantly  insignifi- 
cance insignia  institute  insubordinate  insubordination  in- 
superable integrity  intellect  intelligent  intelligence  intelli- 
gible intelligibility  intemperate  intemperance  into  interior 
internal  interrogate  interrogation  interrogative  intrinsic 
irrational  irrecoverable  irreconcilable  irrefragable  irrefuta- 
ble irrelevant  irreligion  irreligious  irrepressible  irrespect- 
ive irresponsible  irruption  irregular  irretrievable  irrever- 
ent itinerant 

Jail  Jehovah  Jove  jealous  Jewis-h  joint-stock  jurisdic- 
tion jurisprudence  junction  justification 


SHORT-HAND   VOCABULARY. 


121 


122    •  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

juvenile  juxtaposition 

Kindness  kindly  kingdom  knowledge  know  knowing 
known 

Label  large  lamentable  larger  landscape  language 
languish  legacy  legislate  legislature  legitimate  lengthen 
lenient  libation  liberality  libei'ty  liquidation  longer  lovely 
loving  lovingly  lucidness  luxurious 

Many  magazine  magnificent  magnificence  magnani- 
mous magnanimity  magic  majestic  maladministration  mal- 
feasance malign  malignant  malignancy  manufacture  manu- 
factory manufacturing  manufacturer  manumit  manuscript 
margin,  Mary  marry,  measured  mechanics  mechanical 
mechanism  member  memoranda  memoir  memory  mendi- 
cant menial  mensuration  mention  mercy  merchantable 
merry  mesmerism  Messrs.  might  mighty  million  minimum 
minister  minority,  minute  mint  mind,  misdemeanor  mis- 
erably misfortune  misinformed  misanthropic  mistress  mis- 
represented misrepresentation  misrule  mistake  mistrust 
misunderstanding  moment  monarchy  morality  mortgage 
mournful  moved  movement  Mr.  multiform  multiply  mul- 
tiplication multifarious  multitude  multiple 

Nation  national  nationality  naval  nearly  necessary 
necessity  nest. 


SHORT-HAND    VOCABULAHY, 


123 


^ 


^      fr- 


e-~~^  ^. 


Zl 


3  ^ 


^<4_ 


124  ■  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAN^D. 

never  nevertheless  next  nobody  nondescript  notary  notori- 
ety neuter  notwithstanding  numberless  nutrition 

Object  obedient  obligation  obligatory  observation  occur 
occurrence  oftentimes  official  ominous  omnipotence  om- 
nipotent omnipresent  omniscient  oranivagant  open  opinion 
opportunity  opposition  option  oppression  organ  organs 
organism  organize  organized  organization  origin  original 
ornament  ornamental  ornamentation  Osmian  ostentation 
ostentatious  ostensible  over  owing  owner  onward  only 
ourselves  our  outward  outrageous 

Paragraph  paradise  pai-allel  paralytic  paraphrase  par- 
liamentary parliamentarian  part  parts  party  partisan 
partner  part-owner  patent  patentable  patient  peculiar 
peculiarity  peculiarly  pecuniary  people  perfect  perfection 
perform  pernicious  perpendicular  perpendicularly  perpetu- 
ity perpetual  perplexing  persecution  philanthropy  philan- 
thropic philanthropist  philosophy  philosopher  philosophical 
philosophize  phonography  phonographer  phonographic 
phosphorus  phosphoric  photography  phrenology  phrenolo- 
gist phrenological  physiology  physiological  physiognomy 
physiognomer  physician  picturesque  places  plaintiff  plan- 
etary platform  plenitude  pleasure  plenty  plant  plenary 
plenipotentiary  popular  popularity  population  populous 
popularize  popularization  position  possession  possible  pos- 
sibility possibilities  posterior  post-mortem  poverty  practice 
practical  practicable  precious  preliminary  prejudice  preju- 
dicial  prejudiced   present  premature 


SHORT-HAND   VOCABULARY. 


125 


126     ■  ECLECTIC   SttORT-SAHO. 

premeditate  pretty  prerogative  prescribe  prescription  pre- 
serve preservation  present  presentation  pervert*  prevari- 
cate previous  principal-pie  privilege  probable  probability 
problematic  profitable  proclaim  proclamation  produce  pro- 
ductive profaned  profited  prophet  prophetic  prophetical 
property  proposal  proposition  proscribe  proscription  pro- 
tection protraction  providence  publication  publisher  punish 
punishment  putrescent  pyrotechnics 

Quadruped  qualify  qualification  quaint  quartz  quies- 
cent, quit  quiet,  quorum  quote  question 

Rail  radiant  rational  rabble  raffle  rather  rapturous 
rare  reality  realities  rear  realize  reason  reclaim  recollect 
recollection  reformation  relation  i-elative  related  religion 
religious  regeneration  regenerate  regiment  regular-ly 
regulation  relinquish  reluctant  reliant  relent  remains 
remark  remarkable  remember  remembering  remembrance 
remembered  i-emonstrate  reprehensible  represent  repre- 
sentation representative  repress  republic  republication 
republican  repugnant  repugnance  resemble  resemblance 
resembling  reservation  righteousness  resignation  respect 
respective  respite  responsible  respectable  restrictive  restric- 
tion resurrection  rhetorical  retraction  retrospect  retro- 
spective revelation  revolve  revolution  revulsion  reverse 
ring  right  roar 

Sabbath  Sabbatarian  saccharine  sacrament 


SHORT-HAKD   VOCABULARY. 


127 


/^       -^ 


-r-^- 
_,^^___ 


^ 


.Zl. 


n 


J  ^^ 


-.^ 


P^-/' 


T 


3. 


^ 


^ 


-r^ 


.=^:^ 


4- 


Jl. 


Y 


1,  ^5^  (>  "/^ (V".(\^ 


^g     ^ 


/T? 

o 


JL^' 


~F7 


Q^^^^l^T-^-^ 


(^  /-^/ 


/: 


T^ 


^:2^ 


6^  <^  o. 


128      .  ECLECTIC    SHORT-HAND. 

sacrifice  sacrilege  Sadducee  safety  sagacity  sagacious 
sagaciously  sagaciousness  salubrious  salutary  salutatory 
sample  sanctification  sanctimonious  sanguine  sanguinary 
sanguinely  sanity  satisfaction  satisfy  satisfied  satisfactory 
savior  saying  scholar  school  schooled  script  science  scien- 
tific scripture  sculpture  season  seeing  secure  security 
sectarian  secular  senseless  sensible  sentimental  sentimen- 
talism  sentimentalist  sentimentality  sensation  separate 
separated  separation  session  shocking  short-hand  signify 
significant  significance  signification  significantly  similar 
similarly  simple  singular  singularly  situation  skillful  social 
something,  something  else,  somebody  somewhat  somewhere 
sorrow  special  splendid  spiritualize  strengthen  station 
statement  southern  subject  subjection  subjected  sublime 
subordinate  subscribe  subscription  success  successful  suc- 
cessfully suggest  suggestion  suggestive  supererogation 
superficial  superior  superlative  superscribe  superscription 
supreme  supernatural  supplication  suppression  sunder  sur- 
prising surrender  surveillance  suspend  suspension  sus- 
jncious  suspicion  sustained  sustentatious  synonym  synony- 
mous system  systematic  systemized. 

Synopsis  synoptical  syntax  syriac  Syrian  syringe  syrups 
svstnle  schism  scliismatic  sisters. 


SHORT-HAND   VOCABULARY. 


129 


130     -  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAKD. 

systematize  superstition  syndicate  synthesis  synthetical 

Take  taken  taciturn  teacher  technical  technically  tech- 
nicality temperate  temperance  temporal  temptation  tenant 
tendon  testament  testamentary  testimony  than  thank 
thankful  thankfulness  thankless  thanklessness  thanksgiv- 
ing then  thenceforth  thenceforward  theology  theological 
these  thick  thin  thing  things  thereafter  therefore  therein 
think  thinking  those  thou  though  thoughtful  thousand 
thorough  three  through  thrift  thrust  thrush  together  tol- 
erable tolerably  tolerance  tolerant  tolerate  toleration  tran- 
quil tranquillity  trance  transaction  transcend  transcendent 
transient  transept  transcribe  transcript  transcription 
transfer  transform  transformation  transgi"ess  transit 
transition  transitory  translate  translation  transmute  trans- 
mit transport  transpose  transparent  transubstantiate  tran- 
substantiation  transverse  treasury  trembling  tremblingly 
trem-endous  trespass  trespasses  trinitarian  triumph  trust 
two  too  to  tumult  turbulent  turpitude  tutelage  typograph- 
ical tyrannical 

Ubiquity  ultimo  ultimate  ultimately  unaccountable  un- 
accounted unacknowledged  unanswerable  union  universe 
universalism  unbelief  unbeliever  unchangeable  unchanged 
unchristian  uncomfortable  uncompromising  unconcerned 
uncomparing  unconstrained  unconscious  unconverted  un- 
controllable understand  understood  understanding 


SttORT-HANj)  VOCABULARY. 


131 


y^ 


—r ^ 

-^    ^ — — 


"^v^ 7\y^^       ^-1) 


-c^ 


132      •  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

undertake  unto  unpardonable  unpopular  unprofitable 
unseasonable  unsettled  unsubstantial  unthankful  unwar- 
rantable unwilling  upon  uppermost  upward  useful  usage 
usually  usurper  usurpation  utilitarian  uttermost  utterly 
uttering 

Vague  vagrancy  vanquish  Vatican  variation  vengeance 
ventilate  version  verify  verification  ■versatile  victory  vicious 
vision  villain  visible  vocation  volatile  volume  voluminous 
voluntary  voluptuous  vulgar  vulnerable 

Was  we  or  with  the,  wafer  wage  wager  wagon  wavfer 
wait  wake  walk  wander  wanton  warble  wares  warfare 
watch  water  wayward  wax  wealth  weariness  weighing 
weapon  welcome  what  when  where  wherefore  why  which 
wliose  whereupon  while  wicked  willful  winnow  work  work- 
man world  willing  wish  wash  wished  writing  with  without, 
with  you,  worth  whatever,  way  or  with  a,  wages 

Examine  exasperate  exasperation  exceeding  excel  excel- 
lent except  exception  exceptional  or  exceptionable  excessive 
exclusive  exclusion  excluded  excite  excitement  exciting 
excommunicate  excommunication  excommunicated  excre- 
ment excursive  exculpate  excruciating  excursion  excuse 
execrable  execration  execute  execution  exercise  exercises 
exemplary  exhalation  exhortation  exonerate  exoneration 
expansion  expand 


SHORT-HAND   VOCABULARY. 


133 


/     -^^ 


'^-J     ^>  \l. 


"^V^    '^'> 


-='r 


w^ 


^  -- 

■3-^ 


134  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

expansible  expansibility  expected  expectant  expectation 
expedient  expeditious  expensive  experience  experiment  ex- 
perimental experimentally  experimenter  expert  expiate 
explain  explainable  explanation  explanatory  explicit  ex- 
plore explosion  export  exposition  expositor  expository 
expound  express  expulsion  exquisite  extemporary  extem- 
porize, extensive  extenuation  exterior  exterminate  exter- 
mination external  extinction  extinguish  extinguishable 
extinguisher  extinguishment  extirpate  extirpation  extort 
extortion  extortionate  extortioner  extract  extraction  ex- 
tradition extrajudicial  extramundane  extraneous  extraoffi- 
cial  extraordinary  extravagant  extravagance  extravasate 
extreme  exuberant  exult  exalt 

Ye  yes  yet  yesterday  year  yearly  yonder  you  your 
younger  youth  youthful 

FREQUEXT     WORDS. 

(1)  The  thee,  of,  to,  and,  that,  an,  a,  in,  I  eye  aye,  it, 
is,  be,  (2)  for,  this,  not,  which,  have,  as,  there  their,  vpith, 
(3)  his,  he,  from,  will,  by,  but,  we,  are,  you,  (4)  was,  all, 
they,  upon,  has,  at,  no  know,  or,  on,  my,  (5)  any,  them 
then,  beyond,  our.  if,  past,  proper,  himself,  so,  (6)  would, 
wirliout,  been.  what.  one.  hnw  who,  can,  more,  itself,  (7) 
themselves,  stand,  should,  these,  your,  shall,  may,  when, 
frequent,  (S)  him.  now,  powers,  practice,  perfectly,  where, 
had,  great,  those,  than.  (9)  senator,  made,  do,  state,  senate, 
time.  me.  (10)  presence,  placed,  portion,  precisely,  prevent, 
very,  am,  some, 


SHORT-HAND   VOCABULARY. 


135 


I^re  que?7t  Zl^o?^ds 


136  ECLECTIC    SHORT-HAND. 

(1)  man,   question,    warrants,    make,    out,    such,    before, 

(2)  every,  think,  government,  Mr.,  say,  up,  its,  take,  (3) 
see,  person,  presume,  peace,  much,  her,  whether,  into, 
(4)  bill,  commit,  commits,  county,  country,  count,  (5) 
where,  only,  thy,  life,  under,  give,  people,  God,  part,  party, 
(6)  good,  first,  matter,  go,  president,  proposed,  proportion, 
last,  (7)  amount,  among,  subject,  ye,  being,  ask,  word,  pur- 
pose, (8)  business,  car,  care,  just,  action,  vote,  case,  sir,  (9) 
world,  other,  right  rite  write,  never,  on,  morning,  let  led, 
lay,  day,  (10)  duty,  yet,  about,  between,  ever,  said,  there- 
fore, (11)  taken,  says,  while,  declaration,  chairman,  occa- 
sion, according,  (12)  favor,  though,  she,  when,  words,  here- 
tofore, another,  (13)  love,  laws,  lays,  well,  present,  prece- 
dent, objects,  body,  (14)  proposition,  common,  heaven,  even, 
after,  over,  thought,  because,  true,  (15)  0  owe,  nothing, 
understand,  motion,  reason,  river,  perhaps,  (16)  propose, 
moment,  men,  speaker,  resolution,  (17)  amendment,  having, 
years,  pleasure,  spirit,  place,  could.  (18)  human,  believe, 
power,  printing,  full,  way,  why.  partial,  passion,  (19)  partic- 
ular, particularly,  practical,  practically,  practice,  specially, 
splendid,  knowledge. 


SHORT-HANI)   VOCABULARY. 


137 


//le  yu^o  J3a^s  ..,■.— 


^- 


_.£=^ 


^ 


y_ 


-^ 


^ 


-3 


-J^ 


Y- 


-7^ =y- 


^=^ 


CHAPTER  YII. 


READING  AND  WRITING  EXERCISES. 

The  following  lessons  fully  illustrate  the  art  of  writing 
by  this  system. 

The  four  pages  of  selections  from  the  scriptures  have 
each  their  key  on  the  page  facing  the  writing.  After  these 
follow  several  pages  in  which  the  i^rinted  and  written  page 
are  opposite,  which  are  followed  by  a  number  of  written 
pages  without  a  key,  that  the  pupil  may  be  thoroughly 
tested  in  reading. 

The  speech  of  Henry  Clay,  entitled  Military  Insubordi- 
nation, is  written  without  lines,  the  position  of  the  line  at 
the  beginning  of  each  new  line  of  writing  being  indicated 
by  a  small  dash  or  tick,  writing  opposite  the  dash  for  i 
position,  above  it  for  e  and  a  positions,  and  below  it  for  o 
and  u  positions.  Many  pupils  will  find  this  a  desirable 
mode  of  writing,  possibly  more  free  than  the  use  of  ruled 
paper,  while  the  positions  are  sufficiently  clearly  indicated. 

All  the  lists  of  words  and  other  written  exercises  should 
be  written  and  read  many  times,  until  every  word  and 
phrase  is  familiar,  after  which  the  pupil  will  be  ready  to 
write  from  dictation. 

//o?r  to  stiKft/  and  2>ractice. — Having  secured  a  First 
Eeader,  with  some  one  to  read  it,  let  it  be  read  at  first 
slowly  that  the  writer  may  take  it  all.  Gradually  the  reader 
should  increase  his  rate  of  speed,  the  writer  doing  his  best 

138 


READING   AND   WRITING    EXERCISES.  139 

to  follow  him.  The  pupil  is  likely  to  insist  on  continued 
deliberate  reading,  that  he  may  write  all  that  is  read.  This, 
however,  should  not  be  long  continued,  or  the  pupil  will 
contract  a  dragging  method  of  execution  difficult  to  over- 
come. The  only  way  to  get  speed  in  writing  is  to  write 
fast  and  faster.  Hence  the  reader  should  soon  read  at  a 
fair  rate  of  speed,  which  should  be  increased  until  a  high 
speed  is  attained.  It  is  excellent  practice  for  the  reader  to 
utter  very  slowly,  not  more  than  half  a  dozen  or  a  dozen 
words  a  minute,  while  the  writer  strives  to  execute  each 
word  as  many  times  as  possible  before  the  next  word  is 
spoken.  This  will  not  only  greatly  help  in  attaining  rapid 
action,  but  will  secure  that  familiarity  with  words  which 
'is  the  foundation  of  speed.  Let  the  First  Reader  be  read 
and  written  several  times,  until  all  its  words  are  familiar, 
after  which  a  variety  of  reading  should  be  perused  to  fur- 
nish the  writer  with  an  extensive  vocabulary. 

The  pupil  should  not  neglect  to  read  all  he  writes,  that 
he  may  become  familiar  with  his  own  writing,  which  he 
should  be  able  finally  to  i-ead  readily.  In  rapid  practice  do 
not  try  to  restrain  the  action  of  the  hand,  but  let  it  find  its 
natural  action;  let  it  produce  a  coarse  or  fine  style  of 
writing,  whichever  is  the  easier  for  it.  That  will  be  the 
best  style  for  any  one  which  is  natural  to  the  hand  when  in 
unrestrained  vehement  action. 


140     .  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

THE    FARMER    AND    HIS    SONS. 

A  farmer  being  on  the  point  of  death  wished  to  insure 
from  his  sons  the  same  attention  to  his  farm  as  he  had  him- 
self given  it.  He  called  them  to  his  bedside  and  said  : 
"  My  sons,  there  is  a  great  treasure  hidden  in  one  of  my 
vineyards."  The  sons  after  his  death  took  their  spades  and 
mattocks,  and  carefully  dug  over  every  portion  of  their 
land.  They  found  no  treasure,  but  the  vines  repaid  their 
labor  by  an  extraordinary  and  abundant  crop. 

THE    TRAVELER    AND    FORTUNE. 

A  traveler,  wearied  with  a  long  journey,  lay  down, 
overcome  with  fatigue,  on  the  very  brink  of  a  deep  well. 
Being  within  an  inch  of  falling  into  the  water,  Dame  For- 
tune, it  is  said,  appeared  to  him,  and  waking  him  from  his 
slumber  thus  addressed  him:  "Good  Sir,  pray  wake  up, 
for  had  you  fallen  into  the  well  the  blame  will  be  thrown 
on  me,  and  I  shall  get  an  ill  name  among  mortals;  for  I 
find  that  men  are  sure  to  impute  their  calamities  to  me, 
however  much  by  their  own  folly  they  have  really  brought 
them  on  themselves." 

Every  one  is  more  or  less  master  of  his  own  fate. 

THE    .SHEPHERD    AND    THE    DOG. 

A  shepherd  penning  his  sheep  in  the  fold  for  the  night 
was  about  to  shut  up  a  wolf  with  them,  when  his  dog  per- 
ceiving the  wolf,  said:  "Master,  how  can  you  expect  the 
sheep  to  be  safe  if  you  admit  a  wolf  into  the  fold  ?"' 


READING    AND    WRITING    EXERCISES.  141 


-/- 


THE    FARMER    AND    HIS    SONS. 


T 


7" 


"7?=^ 


^ 


-^. 


-rf-J^ 


7^ 


/T 


i^ 


-f 


/^         ' 


^ 


-h 


7^ 


/^->   l^ 


-f^ 


C  ^ ^^f^ 


t 


THE    TRAVELER    AND    FORTUNE. 
^^         51 ^  ^^^ 


~J^ 


_2_ 


-7^ 


^-^ 


^, 


,rr  /7 


.€- 


-/     /  •    '^r-  -^   r 


•^^-- — ? 


^. 


^ —  ^v^ 


-7^ 


-^/-^ 


THE    SHEPHERD    AND    THE    DOG. 


/ 


^ 


^ 


TT^ 


1=£'C 


•7^=?^ 


v^^^ 


142  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 


ST.  JOHN,  CHAPTER  I. 


1  In  the  beginning  was  the  Woi'd,  and  the  Word  was 
with  God,  and  the  Word  was  God. 

2  The  same  was  in  the  beginning  with  God. 

3  All  things  wei-e  made  by  him  ;  and  without  him  was 
not  any  thing  made  that  was  made. 

4  In  him  was  life  ;  and  the  life  was  the  light  of  men. 

5  And  the  light  shineth  in  darkness  ;  and  the  darkness 
comprehended  it  not. 

6  There  was  a  man  sent  from  God,  whose  name  wa£ 
John. 

7  The  same  came  for  a  witness,  to  bear  witness  of  the 
Light,  that  all  men  through  him  might  believe. 

8  He  was  not  that  Light,  but  was  sent  to  bear  witness 
of  that  Light. 

9  That  was  the  true  Light,  which  lighteth  every  man 
that  Cometh  into  the  world. 

10  He  was  in  the  world,  and  the  world  was  made  by 
him.  and  the  world  knew  him  not. 

11  He  came  unto  his  own,  and  his  own  received  him 
not. 

12  But  as  many  as  received  him,  to  them  gave  he 
power  to  become  the  sons  of  God,  even  to  them  that  believe 
on  his  name  : 

13  Which  were  born,  not  of  blood,  nor  of  the  will  of 
the  flesh,  nor  of  the  will  of  man,  but  of  God. 

14  And  the  Word  was  made  flesh,  and  dwelt  among  us, 
(and  we  beheld  his  glory,  the  glory  as  of  the  only  begotten 
of  the  Father,)  full  of  grace  and  truth. 


READIXG    AND    WRITING    EXERCISES.  143 

ST.    JOHN,    CHAPTER    I, 


144'  ■'  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

15  John  bare  witness  of  him,  and  cried,  saying,  This 
was  he  of  whom  I  spake,  He  that  cometh  after  me  is 
preferred  before  me  :  for  he  was  before  me. 

16  And  of  his  fullness  have  all  we  received,  and  grace 
for  grace. 

17  For  the  law  was  given  by  Moses,  but  grace  and 
truth  came  by  Jesus  Christ. 

18  No  man  hath  seen  God  at  any  time  ;  the  only  be- 
gotten Son,  which  is  in  the  bosom  of  the  Father,  he  hath 
declared  him. 

19  And  this  is  the  record  of  John,  when  the  Jews  sent 
priests  and  Levites  from  Jerusalem  to  ask  him.  Who  art 
thou  ? 

20  And  he  confessed,  and  denied  not ;  but  confessed,  I 
am  not  the  Christ. 

21  And  they  asked  him,  What  then  ?  Art  tbou  Ellas  ? 
And  he  saith,  I  am  not.  Art  thou  that  prophet  ?  And  he 
answered,  No. 

22  Then  said  they  unto  him,  Who  art  thou  ?  that  we 
may  give  an  answer  to  them  that  sent  us.  What  sayest 
thou  of  thyself  ? 

23  He  said.  I  am  tlie  voice  of  one  crying  in  the  wilder- 
ness, Make  straight  the  way  of  the  Lord,  as  said  the 
prophet  Esaias. 


BEADING   AND   WRITING   EXERCISES.  145 


/X 


T 


~p^ 


± 


4r 


-A- 


146    '  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

PROVERBS,  CHAPTER  XXVI. 

As  snow  in  summer,  and  as  rain  in  harvest,  so  honor  is 
not  seemly  for  a  fool.  As  the  bird  by  wandering,  as  the 
swallow  by  flying,  so  the  curse  causeless  shall  not  come.  A 
whip  for  the  horse,  a  bridle  for  the  ass,  and  a  rod  for  the 
fool's  back.  Answer  not  a  fool  according  to  his  folly,  lest 
thou  also  be  like  unto  him.  Answer  a  fool  according  to  his 
folly,  lest  he  be  wise  in  his  own  conceit.  He  that  sendeth 
a  message  by  the  hand  of  a  fool,  cutteth  off  the  feet,  and 
drinketh  damage.  The  legs  of  the  lame  are  not  equal  ;  so 
is  a  parable  in  the  mouth  of  fools.  As  he  that  bindeth  a 
stone  in  a  sling,  so  is  he  that  giveth  honor  to  a  fool.  As  a 
thorn  goeth  up  into  the  hand  of  a  drunkard,  so  is  a  parable 
in  the  mouth  of  fools.  The  great  God,  that  formed  all 
things,  both  rewardeth  the  fool,  and  rewardeth  transgress- 
ors. As  a  dog  returneth  to  his  vomit,  so  a  fool  returneth 
to  his  folly.  Seest  thou  a  man  wise  in  his  own  conceit  ? 
there  is  more  hope  of  a  fool  than  of  him.  The  slothful 
man  saith,  There  is  a  lion  in  the  way,  a  lion  is  in  the 
streets.  As  the  door  turneth  upon  his  hinges,  so  doth  the 
slothful  upon  his  bed.  The  slothful  hideth  his  hand  in  his 
bosom  ;  it  grieveth  him  to  bring  it  again  to  his  mouth. 
The  sluggard  is  wiser  in  his  own  conceit  than  seven  men 
that  can  render  a  reason. 


READING    AJiTD   WRITING    ?:XERCISES. 


147 


PROVERBS,    CHAPTER    XXVI. 


148 


ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 


THE    LORD  S    PRATER. 


■-      J? 


-//- 


^ 


J    ^^ ^  .     ^ 


■"J  ^  f/  C^    ^  - 


v^'t^ 


^N 


-:^V^ 


\ 


1^ 


-=7^ 


"7~7- 


^ 


"C 


f  '  yi  •  ^ t:'VZ" 


x::: 


# — /'  /» 


THE    PRAYER    PHRASED. 


THE    PRAYER    WRITTEN'    WITH    EXGROSSIXG    PEN. 


KEADING   AND    WRITING    EXERCISES  149 


'A?  fiirrf'^  Mrnger. 


Oim  d'uihei^  mho  utt  in  fmupm^ 
JiaUmmd  tie  ihtf  name. 

Sh§  km^om  mme. 

Shy  fdU  be  done  in  eutih,  xd  it 
i^  in  hmmn. 

§im  id  thU  4ay>  otm  duH§  bmud. 

Jlnd  fo/t^im  td  mii  debU,  td  me 
for^^im  oui  debiorS^. 

JInd  lead  ui  noi  inio  km^Uon, 
but  delimt  id  from  ei^ii: 

zfoi  ihine  li  the  kingdom,  and 
the  ^omer,  und  the  ^ioty,  for  eper. 
Jlmen. 


150   ■  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

THE  SPREAD  OF  CHRISTIANITY. 


WILLIASI    H.    MILBURK. 


"  And  he  said  unto  them,  Go  ye  into  all  the  world,  and 
preach  the  gospel  to  every  creature." 

To  appreciate  the  text,  it  is  necessary  to  place  your- 
selves in  the  sight  of  the  speaker  and  of  those  who  heard 
him.  A  handful  of  despised  and  proscribed  men  are  stand- 
ing upon  the  summit  of  a  mountain,  and  there,  amidst  the 
comimny,  is  one  who  has  passed  a  life  of  poverty,  sorrow 
and  suffering  ;  upon  whom  contumely  and  derision  have 
descended  like  rain  from  the  clouds  of  summer.  He  has 
been  the  butt  of  ridicule,  the  target  at  which  malignity 
has  directed  all  its  arrows  ;  and  now,  surrounded  by  a 
handful  of  disciples — of  those  who  have  striven  to  be  loyal 
to  hiin.  but  whose  flesh  and  heart  have  failed  time  and 
again, —  the  Jewish  peasant  utters  in  the  ear  of  Jewish 
peasants,  publicans  and  fishermen,  this  language,  the  like 
of  which  had  not  been  spoken  on  the  earth  before, — 
'■  Go  into  all  the  world."'  It  is  either  sublimity  or  absurd- 
ity; it  is  the  enianatiou  of  a  divine  soul  projecting  itself 
in  the  shape  of  a  divine  purpose,  or  it  is  the  most  pre- 
posterous nonsense  that  was  ever  addressed  by  one  man  to 
another. 


READING   AND   WRITING    EXERCISES. 


-^ 


151 


^sL 


-7^ 


■^zy-^ 


^^ 


152'  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

"  Go  into  all  the  world,  and  preach  my  gospel  to  every 
creature."  A  Jewish  peasant,  I  say,  speaking  to  a  handful 
of  Jewish  peasants;  and  these  men,  without  education, 
without  friends,  without  advantages  of  any  sort,  belonging 
to  an  obscure  tribe,  living  in  a  narrow  and  insignificant 
province,  masters  of  a  single  dialect  alone,  and  that  a  mere 
patois, — these  men,  without  adventitious  helps  of  any  kind, 
without  the  power  to  obtain  credentials  from  any  quarter 
of  the  world,  were  to  go  into  all  the  world  and  preach 
what  he  had  been  preaching,  and  what  he  should  yet  de- 
clare to  them.     Is  it  sublimity,  or  absurdity? 

I  fancy  if  you  and  I  had  been  present  on  that  occa- 
sion, we  should  have  said,  had  we  thought  of  it  at  all.  What 
perfect  nonsense!  For  it  is  likely  that  the  scales  would 
have  been  upon  our  eyes,  and  the  dust  in  our  atmos- 
phere, so  that  we  should  not  have  discerned  him  for  what, 
in  truth,  he  Avas, — the  Son  of  the  living  God. 

We  should  have  seen  the  derided  Nazarene,  the  con- 
temned Galilean,  the  carpenter's  son;  we  should  have  seen 
the  earthly  side,  the  mere  mortal  presentation. 

It  requires  a  spirit  quickened  by  light  from  heaven 
to  discern  him  for  what,  in  reality,  he  was,  —  Jesus,  the 
Son  of  God. 


READING   AND    WRITING    EXERCISES. 


'        ^^ --^     //- 


^-^ 


~^ 


-^ 


jL^ 


-,^ 


154   ■  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

Flesh  and  blood  did  not  reveal  this,  but  the  spirit  of 
the  Father  which  is  in  heaven;  and  looking  only  on  the 
mortal  side,  this  command  would  appear  the  very  perfec- 
tion of  nonsense:  "Go  ye  into  all  the  world." 

Yonder  to  the  east  lay  Parthia,  Media  and  farthest 
India;  and  here  upon  the  north,  Syria,  Armenia  and  all 
the  regions  stretching  to  the  pole;  upon  the  south,  Arabia, 
Egypt  and  Ethiopia;  and  westward,  the  lesser  Asia,  and 
Europe  to  the  Pillars  of  Hercules.  "  Go  into  all  these 
tracts,  all  these  realms,  and  preach  without  means,  with- 
out auxiliaries,  and  not  only  that,  but  without  all  helps 
of  earthly  mold  and  shape. 

"Go,  in  spite  of  the  angry  bitterness  of  the  Jews;  in 
spite  of  them  who  have  crucified  and  put  me  to  death; 
in  spite  of  all  the  persecutions  which  they  shall  visit 
continually  upon  your  heads;  despite  the  sneer,  the  con- 
tempt, the  unutterable  scorn  of  Greeks  and  Eomans;  de- 
spite, when  attention  has  been  challenged,  and  their  in- 
terest in  some  sort  awakened,  the  strong  and  glittering 
sword  of  imperial  persecution;  go,  in  spite  of  dungeon, 
gibbet  and  rack:  in  spite  of  thong,  and  scourge,  and  stake; 
in  spite  of  the  cross  and  amphitheater;  go  wherever  a 
human  creature  is  found,  whether  in  civilization  or  in 
barbarism,  and  preacli  my  gospel."  I  say,  is  it  not  either 
sublimity  or  absurdity? 


READING   AND   WRITING    EXERCISES. 


155 


156  '  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

Is  it  not  the  loftiest  word  that  ever  was  spoken  upon 
the  earth,  or  the  merest  nonsense? 

Had  we  been  there  we  should  probably  have  thought 
it  nonsense.  Which  do  we  now  declare  it  to  be,  —  the 
word  of  an  idle  prater,  of  a  well  meaning  but  weak  en- 
thusiast, or  the  word  of  the  Son  of  God?  One  or  the 
other  it  must  be  —  which  is  it? 

It  has  been  well  observed  that  the  best  evidence  in 
favor  of  Christianity  is  Christendom.  Here  you  have  a 
popular  argument  which  adapts  itself  to  the  comprehen- 
sion and  acceptance  of  all.  Christendom  is  the  best  ar- 
gument for  Christianity.  That  Jewish  peasant  on  the 
mountain's  summit,  surrounded  by  his  handful  of  despised 
and  persecuted  followers,  now  separated  from  them,  and, 
rising  in  opposition  to  the  laws  of  gravitation  —  rising 
gradually  and  easily  by  his  own  impulsion,  until  hidden 
from  their  longing,  wistful  gaze  —  set  in  motion  causes 
and  influences  which  have  come  down  the  centuries, 
and  which  have  enshrined  themselves  in  the  affections, 
and  embodied  themselves  in  the  activity  of  the  world, 
until  its  face  is  entirely  changed,  and  his  name,  then 
the  sport  of  scorn  and  hate,  is  now  the  august,  en- 
throned and  revered  name  of  the  highest,  purest  and 
noblest  part  of  the  human  race.  Around  that  name, 
to-day,    clusters    all    that     hath     worth,    excellency    and 


READIKG   AND   WRITING   EXERCISES. 


158  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAKt). 

power;  all  that  hath  vigor,  adaptive  facility;  all  that 
hath  energy  and  resistless  might,  in  what  we  style  the 
civilization  of  the  time;  around  that  name  it  is  all 
gathered.  The  word  which  was  spoken  upon  the  sum- 
mit of  that  mountain,  "Go,"  has  been  obeyed;  and  in 
virtue  of  the  speaking  of  that  word,  and  the  obedience 
rendered  to  it,  the  world  is  what  it  is. 


READING    AND    WRITING    EXERCISES. 


159 


160   ■  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

MILITARY    INSUBORDINATION. 

HBNBT    CLAT. 

I  will  not  trespass  much  longer  upon  the  time  of  the 
committee,  but  I  trust  I  shall  be  indulged  with  some  few 
reflections  upon  the  danger  of  permitting  the  conduct  on 
which  it  has  been  my  painful  duty  to  animadvert  to 
pass  without  a  solemn  expression  of  the  disapprobation 
of  this  house.  Recall  to  your  mind  the  free  nations 
which    have    gone    before    us.      Where    are    they    now? 

"Gone  glimmering  through  the  dream  of  things  that  were, 
A  school-boy's  tale,  the  wonder  of  an  hour." 

And  how  have  they  lost  their  liberties?  If  we  could 
transport  ourselves  back  to  the  ages  when  Greece  and 
Rome  flourished  in  their  greatest  prosperity,  and,  min- 
gling in  the  throng,  should  ask  a  Grecian  whether  he  did 
not  fear  that  some  daring  military  chieftain,  covered  with 
glory  —  some  Phili)")  or  Alexander  —  would  one  day  over- 
throw the  liberties  of  his  country,  the  confident  and  in- 
dignant Grecian  would  exclaim,  "No!  no!  we  have  noth- 
ing to  fear  from  our  heroes;  our  liberties  shall  be  eter- 
nal." 


HEADING  AND   WRITING   EXERCISES. 


161 


■^c=' 


16'2  ECLECTIC  SHORT-HAKD. 

If  a  Roman  citizen  had  been  asked  whether  he  did 
not  fear  that  the  conqueror  of  Gaul  might  establish  a 
throne  upon  the  ruins  of  public  liberty,  he  would  have 
instantly  repelled  the  unjust  insinuation. 

Yet  Greece  fell;  Caesar  passed  the  Rubicon,  and  the 
patriotic  arm  even  of  Brutus  could  not  preserve  the  lib- 
erties of  his  devoted  country! 

The  celebrated  Madame  de  Stael,  in  her  last  and  per- 
haps her  best  work,  has  said  that  in  the  very  year, 
almost  the  very  month,  when  the  president  of  the  direct- 
ory declared  that  monarchy  would  never  show  its  fright- 
ful head  in  France,  Bonaparte,  with  his  grenadiers,  en- 
tered the  palace  of  St.  Cloud,  and  dispersing  with  the 
bayonet  the  deputies  of  the  people  deliberating  on  the 
affairs  of  tlie  state,  laid  the  foundation  of  that  vast  fabric 
of  despotism  which  overshadowed  all  Europe. 

I  hope  not  to  be  misunderstood;  I  am  far  from  inti- 
mating that  General  Jackson  cherishes  any  designs  inim- 
ical to  the  liberties  of  the  country.  I  believe  his  inten- 
tions to  be  pure  and  patriotic.  I  thank  God  that  he 
would  not.  liut  I  thank  him  still  more  that  he  could  not  if 
he  would,  ovei'turn  the  liberties  of  the  republic.  But  pre- 
cedents, if  bad,  are  fraught  with  the  most  dangerous  conse- 
quences.    Man  has  been  described  by  some  of  those  who 


READING    AND   WRITING   EXERCISES.  163 


164'  ECLECTIC  SHORT-HAKD. 

have  treated  of  his  nature,  as  a  bundle  of  habits. 
The  definition  is  much  truer  when  applied  to  govern- 
ments. Precedents  are  their  habits.  There  is  one  im- 
portant difference  between  the  formation  of  habits  by  an 
individual  and  by  governments.  He  contracts  it  only 
after  frequent  repetition;  a  single  instance  fixes  the  habit 
and  determines  the  direction  of  governments. 

Against  the  alarming  doctrine  of  unlimited  discretion 
in  our  military  commanders,  when  applied  even  to  pris- 
oners of  war,  I  must  enter  my  protest. 

It  begins  upon  them;  it  will  end  on  us.  I  hope  our 
happy  form  of  government  is  to  be  perpetual.  But  if  it 
is  to  be  preserved,  it  must  be  by  the  practice  of  virtue, 
by  justice,  by  moderation,  by  magnanimity,  by  greatness 
of  soul,  by  keeping  a  watchful  and  steady  eye  on  the 
execution,  and  above  all,  l)y  holding  to  a  strict  account- 
ability the  military  branch  of  the  public  force. 

We  are  fighting  a  great  moral  battle,  for  the  benefit 
not  only  of  our  country,  but  of  all  mankind.  The  eyes 
of  the  whole  world  are  in  fixed  attention  upon  us.  One, 
and  the  largest  portion  of  it,  is  gazing  with  contempt, 
witli  jealousy  and  with  envy;  the  other  portion  with  hope, 
witli  fonfidence  and  with  affection. 


166  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

Everywhere  the  black  cloud  of  legitimacy  is  suspended 
over  the  world,  save  only  one  bright  spot,  which  breaks  out 
from  the  political  hemisphere  of  the  west,  to  enlighten  and 
animate  and  gladden  the  human  heart.  Obscure  that,  by 
the  downfall  of  liberty  here,  and  all  mankind  are  en- 
shrouded in  a  pall  of  universal  darkness. 

To  you,  Mr.  Chairman,  belongs  the  high  privilege  of 
transmitting  to  posterity  the  fair  character  and  liberty  of 
our  country.  Do  you  expect  to  execute  this  high  trust  by 
trampling,  or  suffering  to  be  trampled  down,  law,  justice, 
the  constitution  and  the  rights  of  the  people?  by  exhibiting 
examples  of  inhumanity,  and  cruelty  and  ambition?  When 
the  minions  of  despotism  heard  in  Europe  of  the  seiziire  of 
Pensacola,  how  did  they  chuckle  and  chide  the  admirers  of 
our  institutions,  tauntingly  pointing  to  the  demonstration 
of  a  spirit  of  injustice  and  aggrandizement,  made  by  our 
country  in  the  midst  of  an  amicable  negotiation!  Behold, 
said  they,  the  conduct  of  those  who  are  constantly  re- 
proaching kings!  You  saw  how  those  admirers  were 
astounded  and  hung  their  heads.  You  saw,  too,  when  that 
illustrious  man  who  presides  over  us  adopted  his  pacific, 


READING    AND    AVRITING    EXERCISES.  167 


168"  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

moderate  and  just  course,  how  they  once  more  lifted  up 
their  heads  with  exultation  and  delight  beaming  in  their 
countenances.  And  you  saw  how  those  minions  them- 
selves were  finally  compelled  to  unite  in  the  general 
praises  bestowed  upon  our  government.  Beware  how 
you  forfeit  this  exalted  character.  Beware  how  you  give 
a  fatal  sanction  in  this  infant  period  of  our  republic, 
scarcely  yet  two-score  years  old,  to  military  insubordina- 
tion. Remember  that  Greece  had  her  Alexander,  Rome 
her  Caesar,  England  her  Cromwell,  France  her  Bonaparte, 
and  that  if  we  would  escape  the  rock  on  which  they  split 
we  must  avoid  their  errors. 

I  hope  gentlemen  will  deliberately  survey  the  awful 
isthmus  on  which  we  stand.  They  may  bear  down  all  oppo- 
sition; they  may  even  vote  the  general  the  public  thanks; 
they  may  carry  him  triumphantly  through  this  house.  But, 
if  they  do,  in  my  humble  judgment  it  will  be  a  triumph  of 
the  principle  of  insubordination;  a  triumph  of  the  military 
over  the  civil  authority;  a  triumph  over  the  powers  of  this 
house;  a  triumph  over  the  constitution  of  the  land;  and 
I  pray  moHt  devoutly  to  heaven  that  it  may  not  prove,  in 
its  ultimate  effects  and  consequences,  a  triumph  over  the 
liberties  of  the  people. 


KEADING   AND   WRITING   EXERCISES.  169 

/ 


170  ECLECTIC   SHOKT-HAND. 


LESSON  FROM  ROBERT'S  RULES  OF  ORDER  FOR 
DELIBERATIVE  ASSEMBLIES. 


The  two  following  extracts  comprise  twelve  pages  of 
writing  from  Robert's  "  Rules  of  Order,"  namely,  pages 
91-97  and  pages  129-136,  both  inclusive. 

They  are  selected  because  they  contain  a  class  of  words 
with  which  it  is  very  desirable  the  stenogi'apher  should 
become  familiar.  The  "Rules  of  Order"  is  an  excellent 
work  for  the  short-hand  student  to  write  from,  both  because 
of  the  class  of  words  it  contains,  and  because  they  are 
necessarily  so  often  repeated. 

Knffrossiug  2>eii — The  last  four  pages  are  written 
with  the  engrossing  (stub)  pen,  which  may  be  very  satis- 
factorily used  by  employing  the  circle  r. 


READING    AND    WRITING    EXERCISES.  171 


-^J- 


■^^ 


173 


ECLECTIC    SHORT-HAKD. 


.    b- 


-f- 


-7^ 


READINCx   AND   WRITING   EXERCISES.  173 


174 


ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 


JL <2. 


f^ 


-^ 


~J 


-M- 


7  0^-^%-^ 


_r^ 


^^^ 


y^^ — ^ 


■=^ 


c^- 


z^ 


^ 


YA- 


^ 


y  > 

-tV ^ 


-32^: 


r 


-7^ 


^ 


■^^ 


^ 


■7^ 


_.^^ 


^ 


V 


-7#^ 


V^  " 


/  C^ 


^tr- 


/  ?^^ 57 


. ^  •  •^<--^,^ 


r^^ 


7<-^ 


X 


-o^-^ 


^ 


-^ 


READING    AND    WRITING    EXERCISES.  175 

-^^^ ^^^^ 


-f- 


■-H-. 


.^2^ 


-p7^ —     <-  ^^ 


-f ^ 


^^: 
/- 


r^ 


y= 


^^ '    - 


-^i^i^ 


-^ 


-A 


Zli: 


-7*^ 


^ 


^--V-S^ 


Z^. 


-^^ 


.^i 


-^ — ./ 


=^--vY^ 


^^  \^_    o 


-^ 


-^ 


-A^    -^ 


-k^ 


-/- 


^     .      /^ 


^^ — yi«-Z- 


ECLECTIC    SHOKT-HAND 


READING   AND   WRITING   EXERCISEa  IH 


-A 


-^ 


-^■/ 


-o'- 


-7^ 


-^^ 


Y- 


^-^ 


J> 


-TP' 


^ 


-f^-M- 


-J- 


,^^L^ 


-7^ 


.yir^ 


Cy 


y 


-7^ 


^ 


,P       / 


"^^ 


J^^S. 


-e^ 


y 


-V 


17« 


J- — 


ECLECTIC    SHOBT-HAND. 


T     5 


-:7- — 4^- 


-//^ 


-/—^ 


-=-^ 


-4- 


-^ 


"7 


-f- 


jL 


^ 


=^^ 


-//^ — '- 


'-&- 


>^ 


_C 


-^^^ 


-^^ 


_i2^ 


/ 


-y^ 


-;^ 


=^'^ 


-^==^^ 


-^ 


-€, =-^ 


^ 


•-?— 


READIKG    AXD    WRITING    EXERCISES.  179 


^~^, 


180 


ECLECTIC    SHORT-HAND. 


READING   AND   WRITING    EXERCISES. 


181 


ILLUSTRATIVE  COURT  REPORTING  NOTES. 

The  following  is  a  very  complete  foi-m  for  court  records. 
Each  page  being  ruled  with  three  narrow  vertical  columns 
on  its  left  side,  the  first  column  is  used  for  remarks  of  a 
juror,  the  second  for  remarks  of  the  judge,  the  third  for 
remarks  of  2)laintifF's  attorney;  remarks  of  the  defendant's 
attorney  are  begun  at  the  right  of  the  third  line,  and  the 
witnesses'  remarks  a  space  further  to  the  right. 


183'  ECLECTIC    SHORT-HAND. 


CHAPTER  VIII. 


MISCELLANEOUS  SUGGESTIONS  AND  LEGAL 
REPORTING. 

WHHng  and  omission  of  vowels. — While  most  sys- 
tems of  short-hand  are  constructed  on  the  principle  of 
making  as  little  use  as  possible  of  vowels,  this  system 
makes  the  utmost  possible  use  of  them.  Often  a  written 
vowel  stroke  is  capable  of  several  contractions,  while  if  the 
vowel  were  not  written,  the  contractions  would  be  impos- 
sible, and  it  would  become  necessary  to  write  a  stroke  for 
each  contraction  which  has  been  expressed  by  the  use  of  the 
vowel.  In  all  such  cases  the  vowel  should  be  used,  not 
only  because  its  use  abbreviates,  but  because  it  also  adds 
legibility  to  the  writing. 

If  a  vowel  is  necessary  to  the  pronunciation,  it  should 
generally  be  written,  whether  it  can  take  contractions  or. 
not. 

If  it  is  the  second  letter  of  a  word  it  is  always  ex- 
pressed by  the  position  of  the  preceding  letter,  which  may 
at  the  same  time  be  so  written  as  to  express  the  contrac- 
tions which  would  naturally  follow  and  be  added  to  the 
vowel  if  it  were  written:  thus  the  word  ^W}\  in  which  the 
r  following  the  o  is  naturally  added  to  it  by  shading  :  the 
w  is  written  on  o  position  and  shaded  to  express  the  r 
which  follows  the  position  letter.  Omit  all  vowels  which 
may  be  omitted  without  impairing  the  legibility. 

183 


184  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

Words  containing  a  single  consonant,  both  beginning 
and  ending  with  a  vowel,  should  have  both  vowels  writ- 
ten, as  assay,  obey,  etc. 

Vowels  may  usually  be  omitted  with  safety  when  un- 
accented. 

Initial    vowels    may    often    be    omitted.      Diphthongs 

should  usually  be  written  —  the  learner  will  find  them 
provided  for  under  the  head  of  Shading,  page  31. 

Experience  in  writing  and  reading  is  the  only  guide 
on  which  the  stenographer  can  rely  for  rules  in  the 
omission  of  vowels.  Careful  daily  practice  will  finally 
give  an  intuitive  ability  better  than  rigid  laws. 

Writing  and  Omission  of  Consonants. —  Omit  all 
silent  and  one  of  doubled  consonants,  and,  in  general,  any 
consonant  the  writing  of  which  would  necessitate  a  difii- 
cult  outline,  and  the  omission  of  which  will  not  endanger 
the  legibility — as  c,  from  instruction,  obstruction,  destruction, 
protraction,  etc.;  (7,  from  under,  render,  etc.;  /,  from  intelli- 
gence, faJselij,  etc.;  n,  from  treoispose,  merchandise,  identify, 
etc.:  j;,  from  capable,  inapt,  etc.;  r,  from  describe,  surprise, 
tra)iscript,  manuscript,  subscribe,  etc.;  tg,  from  investigation, 
etc. 

In  contracting  a  word,  seize  on  and  write  those  main 
elements  of  it  which  will  on  sight  suggest  it. 

Omission  of  Words  and  Syllables. —  In  very  rapid 
writing,  it  may  sometimes  be  necessary  to  omit  obvious 
words  which  may  be  supplied  in  the  transcx'ipt,  but  it  is 
bad  in  general  practice,  and  should  not  be  done  except  when 
unavoidable.  Syllables  are  sometimes  omitted  from  the 
beginninc^,  middle,  or  end  of  a  word,  when  it  will  not  im- 
pair the  legibility;  see  page  88. 


REPORTING   STYLE.  185 

Omission  of  Words, — The  preceding  signs  and  con- 
tractions leave  little  further  to  be  desired  to  secure 
the  speed  necessary  to  the  most  rapid  writing.  In  re- 
porting, many  words  which  are  obvious  from  the  con- 
text are  omitted,  and  again  supplied  in  reading  or  tran- 
scribing. When  any  word  is  omitted,  the  space  left  may 
be  greater  than  between  other  words,  to  indicate  an  omis- 
sion, which,  with  the  context,  will  assist  to  supply  the 
omitted  word  or  words.  What  words  may  thus  be  omitted 
the  experience  and  thoughtfulness  of  the  writer  will  best 
determine. 

The  tongue  is  a  very  flexible  instrument,  and  the  pen 
to  cope  with  it  must  be  able  to  express  words  with  even 
less  strokes  than  are  indicated  by  the  movements  of  the 
tongue  in  utterance.  Such  prefixes  as  ap,  ac,  in,  en,  ira, 
in,  con,  and  others,  from  the  beginning  of  words;  and  suf- 
fixes like  cial,  tial,  ly,  tiate,  tion,  sion,  ment,  and  many 
others,  may  be  often  safely  omitted  from  the  end  of  words; 
the  st3nographer  relying  on  the  context  to  supply  the 
omissions  when  reading. 

A  repetition  of  a  phrase  or  sentence  may  be  indicated 
by  drawing  a  line  underneath  the  one  already  written, 
or  by  a  long  dash  after  it. 

In  writing  up  special  or  technical  cases  it  sometimes 
occurs  that  technical  terms,  or  proper  names,  or  other 
words  of  inconvenient  length,  are  frequently  repeated.  In 
such  cases,  after  writing  them  once  or  twice,  the  writer 
may  suggest  them  by  using  the  first  letter  followed  by  a 
dash,  or  may  extemporize  a  brief  suggestive  outline  from 
the  principal  elements  of  the  words. 

Punctuation. — All  the  marks  common  to  punctuation 


186  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

may  be  used  in  short-hand;  but  in  reporting,  only  the 
longer  pauses  are  denoted.  The  period  is  represented  by 
a  small  oblique  cross,  or  by  two  dots  side  by  side.  The 
latter  are  easier  to  write,  and  more  certain  to  be  well 
made.  The  use  of  the  period  dot  interferes  with  the  use 
of  the  dot  as  a  word  sign,  hence,  it  is  supplied  by  the  two 
dots  or  cross.    The  dash  is  represented  by  a  slight  waved 

line,  thus Laughter,  by  a  similar  line  more  heavily 

waved.  Applause,  by  a  vertical  waved  line.  Emphasis  is 
indicated  as  in  long-hand,  by  drawing  a  line  or  more  under 
the  emphatic  word  or  words.  Capitals  are  used  at  the  be- 
ginning of  a  sentence,  and  in  all  other  cases  in  which  they 
are  necessary.  Initials  and  proper  names  are  correctly 
written  in  this  system,  while  the  phonographer  is  generally 
embarrassed  by  them.  Names  should  generally  be  written 
without  abbreviation. 

Short-Hand  Notation. —  The  following  characters 
will  enable  the  short-hand  writer  to  express  numbers  with 
one-half  the  movements  necessary  to  the  use  of  the  Arabic 
characters. 

/     c^      J     Ai.     S     S   /    <r  f  ^. 


///"//   /  /  f  /. 


The  cipher,  when  following  any  digit,  is  attached  to  it, 
but  tlie  pen  lifted  for  each  additional  cipher.  The  character 
one  is  always  struck  downward,  hence,  after  a  horizontal 
line  an  upward  stroke  may  be  made  for  a  cipher;  its  con- 
nection witli  tlio  horizontal  line  indicating  that  it  is  struck 
upward,  and  to  tlie  top  of  this  another  horizontal  line  is 
made  for  a  cipher,  thus: 


REPORTIKG    STYLE.  187 

EXAMPLE    IN    ADDITION. 

Although  these  characters  are  quite  simple,  yet  they 
can  be  used  to  advantage  only  by  perfect  familiarity  with 
them,  when  they  become  as  legible  as  the  Arabic  char- 
acters. 

Freparhig  Copy — Copy  for  the  printer  should  be 
written  in  a  plain,  legible  hand,  with  correct  spelling, 
punctuation  and  capitalization.  Emphatic  words  are  indi- 
cated by  drawing  one  line  under  them  for  italics,  two 
lines  to  indicate  small  capitals,  and  three  lines  for  CAP- 
ITALS. The  writing  should  be  done  with  good  ink,  and 
on  but  one  side  of  the  leaf.  In  case  writing  is  done  on 
both  sides,  it  should  be  indicated  at  the  bottom  of  the 
first  page  by  the  word  "  over,"  written  at  the  lower  right 
corner. 

JProof-readiiig. — The  two  pages  which  follow,  exhibit- 
ing the  technical  marks  in  ordinary  use  employed  in  cor- 
recting proof,  were  prepared  by  a  professional  proof-reader. 
These  marks  being  understood  in  the  printing-office,  re- 
porters and  others,  in  correcting  for  the  printers,  should 
study  and  master  them. 


SPECIMEN  OF  PROOF-SHEET  MARKED  FOR  CORRECTION. 

y^        ^r.  THOMAS.    I  Ho  not  wish  to  jJresenT  ibat  as  tlie  view  of   X     ufi- 
Q      ili6  gentleman  from  Miss^issippi  if  it  was  the  view  of  ano'tier.  .All 
^ffiK.  I  liave  ffw-to  say  is,  it  was  ^^  correct  vjewj    And  .let  me  say  it'=^  © 
/—[  ;was  the  correct  view. Jor  this  reason,  thatjjthe  committee  were  re-  '  ^ 
stricted  as  to  evidence,  and  could  not  golo  the  centre)  of  the  evi-    «^^  v 
ae1^C^ireferred  to  them  in  the  pending,  contest;  and  ««d  no  gentle^^of  0        \ 
that  committee  influenced  by  any  view  of  the  .case  which  he  might? 
)iave '^rom  ^  having^Tooked  into  the  '^evidence.l'^relating  to  ^ the    Wy  ^ 
\f-    ^ontest/Ifendingl     In  the  case  Clark  vs.  Giddings,  I  believe  the 

majority  of  the  Committee  on  Elections  thought  Clark  could  bepm'dvt/v-  . 
iseated  after  he  had  been  admitted  to  a  prima  facie  seat  and.  had        iro/t' 
beenswornjn^ 
mx/vu  v\/y   ^And  it  turned  out  that  Tie  was  afterward  unseated,  j  Perhaps     ^|  ^ 
I  am  about  to  speak  hastily,  but  I  will  sajrl  think,  if  I  knew  now 
-1     today  that  Wiltshire,  would  upon  the  heai-ing  of  his  contesfed- 
C    -1^      clect^oncase  be  declared  not  elected  to  the  seat,  still  it  would    jrvu1W^C<!m 
be  the  duty  of  the  Committee  on  Elections  to  I'eport  this  resoliL     -\ 
(A^/     tion,  and  the  duty  of  the  ^ouse  to  admit  him  to  a  seat,  until  the>,      *    , 
question  of  fact  is  ascertained  and  the  case  decided  upon  its  merits.   . 
^1      The  committee  have  nothinfftlien,  to  do  with  that  view  of  it;  that  yv 

'      is  a  matter  .to  come  up  hereafter.    Is  there  any  objection  to  tBatj     ll        ' 
□       l^ow  let  me  go  back  to  what  I  was  about  to  cite,  to  show  tjtal  this    V.C;  ^ 
S)     (\      certificate  "Ts  in  proper  form,  or  in  form  Avords  which  I  do  not  con-  ^ 

{,         I  sider  material),  to  the  case  j»f  Foster  against  Ck^sar.     In  that  MA     £ 
.  case  the  governor  bad  issued  a  proclamation  as  to  which  the  com- 

d  Ai^     mittee  say  it  is  a  blank  in  reference  to' the  (fl^  district,  and  they/ 
did  not  consider  it.  . 

^r-        Uffijtn  the  vei-y  face  of  the  certificate  the  ffiovernor  states  that  X.(/, 
\-\  as  the  acting  governor  had  faled  to  issue  a  certificate,  for  that  -^ 

UO'sason  he  (the  governor)  certifies  ^'  that  the  foveVgoing  statement  /  ^    ^ 
^  '\vith  the  explanatory  notes"  is  a  "full,  true,  ana  correct  exhibit 

'  of  the  votes  polled  for  the  Representative  from  the  third  congres-  . 

1      sional  district  of  Arkansas,  Mr.  Warp.f.n.  y^  M"] 

Tr^     I  yield  fifteen  minute  sto  the  gentleman  from  Tennessee  [Mr.   ' 
yi.  Wivi     Harrison]  ■ 

'C^v4     Mr.  Hakrison.    I  want  to  ask  the  chairman  [Mr.  Shanks"!  if  the  ^.^. 


r.» 


>^  EXPLANATION.  -v 

O     also  written  (ieZe;  Lat.rfeiere,  to  blot  out:  a  technically-shaped  terminal  O  (d) 
fiV^     Lat.  stet,  let  it  stand.    The  dots  under  should  not  bo  omitted 
j— '      em*  dash.    An  en*  dash  may  be  more  clearly  expressed  thus  (jv  « 
V"     the  first  two  letters  of  tho  word  trarupoae;  reverse  the  order  of  words  or  letters 
JUMVIAV     make  no  paragraph.    The  lino  is  indispensable,  but  this  with  VlO^|    will  be  plain 
"1      hyphen.    No  other  mark,  or  remark,  is  necessary  in  the  margin  of  proof 
C^     bring  words  or  letters  close  together 
□      em*  quadrat.    An  en*  quadrat  should  bo  marked  W' fl 

S)      turn  around.    This  mark  is  different  from  a    O  but  is  frequently  mistaken  for  it 
L     bring  out  to  line,  or  bring  thus  far  to  left.    To  move  to  right  express  thus^ 

a  thin  metal  plate  used  between  lines.t    Surface  of  lead  sho^vn  on  opposite  page 
Vril'    transi>ose  space  so  as  to  make  proper  words;  change  one  space  with  another 
y^      substitute  perfect  for  imperfect  type 

«*•  the  first  letters  of  the  words  icrongfont.    A  font  is  a  series  of  type 
;— ^    make  words  or  letters  range,  or  line  properly 
^    push  down  below  type-height  so  as  not  to  appear 
y/     observe  matter  encircled.    This  mark  does  not  necessarily  suggest  errort 

\     correctness  of  matter  encircled  is  questioned 
^/Oji(   equalize  space  between  words  or  lines 
(jVSV    take  over  to  the  beginning  of  the  next  line 
)J^i)Jij    use  Italic  type.    Roman  type  should  be  indicated  thus  j\fftN 
Ml      make  paragraph. 
ftw^fAt^toW  insert  as  copy.    This  means  that  matter  is  omitted,  for  which  see  original  copy 

^1     interrogation-point.    This  reference  should  not  be  confounded  with  the  query  mark 
L  fy,     use  lower-case  letters.    The  ordinary  body-type  of  a  book  is  called  lower-case 

diphthong.    The  kem  over  represents  a  ligature,  and  should  always  be  marked  M\ 
spell  instead  of  using  figures;  or  tho  word  or  words  may  be  written  in  the  margin 
^     Inverted  commsi.    One  of  two  points  being  wrong  ( ', ),  both  may  be  marked  ^ 
0     take  out,  leaving  no  space.    The  mark  below  the  (/    means  close  up 
li.Cti\vA     use  small  capitals.      One  letter  may  be  marked  A.C'.  or  it  may  be  indicated  thus  (V\ 
^/^Mi    use  capitals.      One  letter  may  be  written  in  margrin,  thus  (lv\ 

*  An  em  quadrat  is  a  space  the  thickness  of  the  letter  m  of  the  type  used;  an  en  is  half 
that  thickness,  or  a  space  equal  to  the  letter  n 


t  The  word  Uad  is  also  used  as  a  verb,  and  means  to  lead  out,  or  put  leads  between  the  lines 
X  Those  marks  shouM  never  appear  unnoticed  in  margin  of  proof  returned  to  printers;  the 
necessary  correction  should  be  made  or  the  reference  marked  off 


190  ECLECTIC    SHORT-HAND. 

Writing. — For  writing  on  the  knee,  a  small  board  may 
be  employed,  on  which  to  lay  the  book  or  paper,  and  steady 
the  hand.  Such  a  board  should  be  light  but  firm,  about 
sixteen  inches  long  by  eight  broad.  It  may  be  hinged  in 
the  middle,  a  spring  holding  it  firmly  when  open ;  when 
not  in  use  it  is  closed,  and  thus  easily  carried  in  the 
pocket. 

If  a  pencil  is  used,  it  should  be  a  good  one,  well 
sharpened,  the  reporter  always  keeping  several  on  hand. 
If  a  steel  pen  is  used,  it  should  have  a  firm,  fine,  smooth 
and  flexible  point.  The  acidity  of  the  inks  in  use  soon 
renders  the  steel  pen  too  sharp  for  very  rapid  and  per- 
fect writing.  A  perfect  gold  pen  is  the  only  reliable  in- 
strument for  the  reporter,  and  should  have  a  fine,  smooth 
point,  with  flexible  nibs. 

Materials — The  writer  must  be  skillful  in  the  use 
of  both  the  pencil  and  pen.  If  the  pencil  is  used,  soft 
paper  becomes  necessary,  while  with  the  pen,  fine  calen- 
dered paper,  of  medium  hardness,  is  essential  to  easy 
writing.  When  a  table  on  which  to  write  can  be  secured 
it  is  preferable.  The  reporter  must,  however,  be  able  to 
write  on  a  book  held  on  his  hand,  or  knee,  as  occasion 
may  require.  Reporting  covers  are  on  sale  at  all  sta- 
tioners. They  consist  of  stiff  leather  covers  about  eight 
and  three  fourths  by  four  and  a  half  inches,  opening 
lengthwise,  and  having  an  elastic  band  attached  for  hold- 
ing the  paper.  The  reporter,  opening  the  book  away 
from  him,  writes  on  the  leaf  nearest  him,  continually 
turning  the  leaves  backward  until  he  is  through  the 
book,  when  he  turns  it  over  and  writes  on  the  opposite 
side  of  each  leaf. 


REPORTING   STYLE.  191 

Method  of  Practice. — Having  become  familial*  with 
the  abbreviation  word  and  phrase  signs  and  with  the  prin- 
ciples of  their  construction,  the  illustrative  lessons  should 
be  repeatedly  written,  and  compared  with  the  copy  given, 
to  see  that  the  correct  signs  and  best  word  forms  are  used; 
the  student  will  then  find  great  assistance  in  the  use  of  the 
Reporter's  Classic  Practice  Tablets,  prepared  by  the  author 
for  students  of  short-hand.  Let  each  character  be  formed 
as  quickly  as  possible  to  the  writer's  natural  power  of 
movement,  never  dragging  the  pen,  but,  having  cleai'ly 
conceived  the  best  word  form,  let  it  be  quickly  written. 

Having  written  and  re-written  as  many  of  the  tablets 
as  the  student  thinks  best,  let  him  then  procure  the 
service  of  some  one  to  read  for  him,  who  shall  regulate 
his  reading  to  the  ability  of  the  writer,  slowly  and 
distinctly  at  first,  increasing  in  speed  as  the  learner 
acquires  power,  until  he  is  able  to  keep  pace  with  the 
most  rapid  reading  of  various  kinds  of  discourse. 

Everj^thing  written  should  be  read  to  acquire  ability 
in  reading  the  short-hand  characters,  Avhich  is  as  essential 
as  rapid  writing.  The  rate  of  speed  requisite  to  reporting 
varies  with  the  utterance  of  the  speaker  from  eighty  to 
two  hundred  words  a  minute,  the  average  rate  beingr 
about  one  hundred  and  forty  to  one  hundred  and  fifty. 

The  writer  should  frequently  time  himself,  to  note 
his  progi'ess  in  rapidity. 

Having  prepared  himself  thus,  he  should  try  notes  of 
speeches,  sermons,  etc.,  as  they  are  uttered,  until  he 
finally  finds  himself  capable  of  legibly  recording  the 
thoughts  of  the  most  vehement  utterer. 

Di'opping  into  all  kinds  of  assemblies,  taking  notes  of 


192  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

all  kinds  of  discourse,  to  familiarize  himself  with  report- 
ing in  general,  the  writer  will  render  himself  capable 
fcr  any  emergency. 

Verbatim  Beporting.—AccursLcy  in  reporting  speeches, 
lectures,  sermons,  etc.,  is  essential,  but  in  important  cases 
courtesy  demands  that  the  report,  if  possible,  be  sub- 
mitted to  the  speaker  for  his  corrections  or  revision,  as, 
in  extemporary  discourse  especially,  it  often  occurs  that 
the  speaker  would  prefer  to  modify  many  things  before 
submitting  his  words  to  the  press.  The  reporter  should 
be  skilled  in  the  use  of  language,  that  he  may  correct 
inaccuracies  of  speech  which  are  so  likely  to  occur  in  such 
discourse.  However,  such  corrections  cannot  waive  the 
propriety  of  submitting  the  report  to  the  revision  of  the 
speaker  when  it  is  practicable  to  do  so. 

In  Legal  repoHing  the  writer  should  be  conversant 
with  the  legal  forms  and  expressions  in  use,  as  the  more 
he  understands  of  these  the  better  will  he  be  able  to 
report.  Much  depends  on  mere  form.  There  is  always 
much  talking  done  by  counsel,  often  long  arguments,  the 
verbatim  reporting  of  which  would  subject  the  parties 
to  much  needless  expense,  besides  rendering  the  reports 
tediously  voluminous.  The  proper  writing  of  objections, 
motions  and  rulings  can  be  done  only  by  the  exercise  of 
good  judgment,  based  on  a  knowledge  of  the  require- 
ments of  a  correct  report  of  such  matter.  Often  an 
objection  by  counsel  is  couched  in  a  long  argument, 
which  the  reporter  of  good  judgment  and  acquaintance 
with  legal  phraseology  puts  in  its  proper  form  by  a  few 
words.  The  author  has  frequently  heard  legal  gentle- 
men complain  of  phonographic  reports,  on  the  assumption 


REPORTING   STYLE.  193 

that  it  is  impossible  for  the  short-hand  reporter  to  write 
without  giving  every  word  uttered. 

The  objection  to  the  voluminous  report  is  of  course 
often  just,  but  it  does  not  lie  in  the  use  of  phonography 
or  short-band  notes  so  much  as  in  the  inability  and 
inexperience  of  the  reporter,  who,  if  he  could  but  con- 
dense the  counsel's  argument,  would  be  able,  because  of 
his  skill  in  writing,  the  better  to  make  a  clear  presenta- 
tion of  it. 

In  such  cases  the  writer  should  attend  closely  to 
what  is  said  and  done,  and  having  clearly  comprehended 
an  idea,  couch  it,  as  directly  and  briefly  as  possible,  in 
legal  phrase. 

Unless  required,  no  report  need  be  made  of  the  open- 
ing remarks  of  counsel,  who  generally  dictate  to  the 
writer  those  points  which  need  not  be  written. 

In  ordinary  civil  cases  the  reporter  has  usually 
nothing  to  do  with  the  impaneling  of  the  jury,  but  in 
criminal  cases  it  should  be  fully  reported. 

In  the  examination  of  witnesses,  every  word,  both  of 
questions  and  answers,  should  be  exactly  written.  The 
summing  up  of  counsel  »^eed  not  be  reported  unless 
ordei'ed  by  the  same.  The  judge's  charge,  except  when 
it  is  written,  when  of  course  reporting  is  unnecessary, 
must  be  written  with  the  utmost  fidelity. 

A  short  experience  will  inform  the  reporter  fully  as 
to  what  need  and  what  need  not,  be  written,  while  the 
inexperienced  reporter  will  rely  mainly  upon  the  dicta- 
tion of  counsel,  who  will  suggest  at  the  proper  time  what 
need  not  be  taken. 

Legal  reports  are  usually  written  on  legal  cap,  writ- 


19'4  ECLECTIC    SHORT-HAND. 

ing  on  both  sides  of  the  leaf,  unless  counsel  prefer  it 
otherwise.  Each  page  is  numbered  as  it  is  written,  at 
the  lower  left  corner.  The  paper  for  reports  should  be 
fastened  by  means  of  clasps,  or  of  tape  passed  through 
holes  punched  near  the  edge  of  the  upper  margin,  and 
tied.  The  first  page  of  the  report  should  be  used  as  a 
title-page,  and  upon  it,  written  in  legible  long-hand,  the 
name  of  the  court,  title  of  suit,  name  of  judge  before 
whom  the  case  is  tried,  and  if  before  a  jury,  date  of  trial, 
names  of  counsel,  with  parties  for  whom  they  appear, 
with  an  index  to  the  evidence.  A  new  title-page  should 
be  made  for  each  day  of  the  trial.  In  case  the  reporter 
uses  the  writing  machine  in  producing  transcripts,  the  title 
page,  as  well  as  the  body  of  the  notes,  will  of  course  be 
printed,  instead  of  written  in  long-hand. 

The  following  seven  different  forms,  adapted  to  the 
courts  of  Illinois  and  to  the  United  States  courts,  will  be 
a  sufficiently  suggestive  guide  to  the  courts  of  the  differ- 
ent states,  the  forms  being  common,  varying  only  in  the 
names  of  the  courts,  or  of  the  terms  applied  to  the  prin- 
cipal parties  involved. 

Following  these  forms  is  a  representation  of  the  method 
of  writing  the  opening  of  a  trial,  and  illustrating  the 
writing  of  testimony.  The  page  is  divided  into  two  spaces 
by  a  vertical  line.  All  questions  and  other  remarks  of  the 
attorneys  and  of  the  court  begin  at  the  left  margin  of  the 
page,  while  answers  of  witnesses  are  written  wholly  on  the 
right  of  the  vertical  line.  This  distinction  between  ques- 
tions and  answers  is  simply  to  facilitate  the  reference  to 
the  notes.  The  very  narrow  paper  advised  by  some  for 
court  reporting  is  not  desirable  in  this  system. 


KEPORTING    STYLE.  195 

TITLE-PAGE   FORMS. 

FORM    I. 

In  the  Probate  Court  of  Cook  County. 

January  Term,  1878. 

State  of  Illinois, 


County  of  Cook,   '' 

In  the  matter  of  the  Estate  of )  p,     n     n  ^xr•^^ 
John  T.  Adams,  deceased.      \ 

Hon.  Joshua  C.  Knickerbocker,  Probate  Judge. 

APPEARANCES. 

For  proponents  of  the  will,  Cyrus  Homer,  Esq. 
For  contestants  of  the  will,  S.  M.  Coles,  Esq. 

INDEX    to    evidence. 

Direct.  Cross. 

Henry  Mann,     -----       page  3  10 

Walter  Wiltsie,     -         -         -         -  "5  11  ^ 

Jane  Wiltsie,    -----  "6  11 


In  the  County  Court  of  Cook  County. 
January  Term,  18T8. 
State  of  Illinois, 
County  of  Cook, 

Peter  Johnson  ) 

vs.  V  Assumpsit. 

Conrad  Reed.   ) 

Hon.  M.  B.  Loomis,  Presiding  Judge. 

appearances. 

For  plaintiff,  Darius  Judd,  Esq. 

For  defendant,  Virgil  A.  Field,  Esq. 

index  to  plaintiff's  evidence. 

Direct.  Cross. 

Trueman  Good,  -         -         -         -       page  4  20 

Wm.  Hoisington,  -         -         -         -      "    10  24 

Exhibit  A,        -         -         -         -         -  "15 


ljf6  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

INDEX    TO    defendant's    EVIDENCE. 

Direct.  Cross. 

Maria  Wilson,  ....       page  25  30 

Exhibit  A, "26 

Exhibit  B, "27 

FORM    III. 

In  THE  Superior  Court  of  Cook  County. 
January  Term,  1878. 
State  of  Illinois, 
County  of  Cook, 

The  remainder  of  this  form  is  like  No.  2. 


;s,  ) 


ss. 


FORM    IV. 

In  the  Circuit  Court  of  Cook  County. 

January  Term,  1878. 

State  of  Illinois,  ) 
County  of  Cook,   ) 

in  chancery. 

John  W.  Ward,  Complainant,  )  tj-h   <•      •    •       i.- 
T  ri  ixj-ii  V  Bill  tor  iniunction. 

James  Saxe,  Dejendant.  )  '' 

Hon.  E.  S.  Williams,  Judge. 

APPEARANCES. 

For  complainant,  Chas.  Lathrop,  Esq. 
For  defendant,  L.  F.  Scott,  Esq. 

form  v. 

In  the  Appellate  Court  of  the  State  of  Illinois. 
first  judicial  district. 

April  Term,  1878. 

AVarren  Miller,  ylppclhint,  )   .  -,    ,.  ±-\      n-       -^ 

_    '     ^^  '  f  Appeal  from  the  Circuit 

-r  rp    c-  ^'        ^       77       i    Court  of  Cook  County. 

Joseph   i.   Smith,  Appellee.   )  -^ 

INDEX. 

Argument  of  C.  D.  T.  Smith,  Esq.        -         -     page  3-76 
Argument  of  Chas.   Wheaton,  Esq.  -  "     77-120 


REPORTING   STYLE.  197 

FORM   VI. 

In  the  Supreme  Couut  of  the  State  of  Illinois. 

northern  grand  division. 

September  Term,  1878. 

Chester  Davis,  Plaintiff  in  Error,  \  ^^^.^^,  ^^    ^^^  (.-^^^i^ 
Henry  R.  Fox,  Defendant  in  Error.  )  ^^^^^^^  ^^  ^^ok  County. 

INDEX. 

Argument  of  W.  H.  Dexter,  Esq.       -  -     page  6-94 

Argument  of  C.  D.  Willis,  Esq.  -  -  "    95-120 

form    VII. 

In  the  Circuit  Court  of  the  United  States. 

northern    district    of    ILLINOIS. 
IN    EQUITY. 

John  I.  Blair  et  al.  )  j^.j,  ^^  "Poreclose 

vs.  y 

Chicago  &  Pacific  R.  R.  Co.  et  al.  )        Mortgage. 
Hon.  Thomas  Drummond,  Presiding. 
appearances. 
For  Complainants,  Geo.  W.  Smith,  Esq. 
For  Defendants,  Chas.  D.  F.  Smith,  Esq. 

INDEX. 


19'8  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

FRAGMENT  OF  REPORT  OF  TRIAL. 


County  Court,  Cook  County. 

Peter  Johnson  ) 

vs.  y  Before  Hon.  M.  B.  Loomis  and  Jury. 

Conrad  Read.  ) 

Chicago,  III.,  January  10, 1878. 
APPEARANCES. 

For  Plaintiff,  M.  0.  B.  Southworth,  Esq. 
For  Defendant,  A.  C.  Little,  Esq. 

Trueman  Good,  on  behalf  of  Plaintiff,  being  duly  sworn, 

testifies  as  follows. 

Direct  examination  by  Mr.  Loomis: 

Q.    Where  do  j'ou  reside? 
J.    At  650  Western  Avenue. 
Q.    How  long  have  you  known  the  plaintiff? 
.1.    Between  three  and  four  years. 
Q.    Have  you  seen  him  often  during  that  period? 
ul.    No,  sir,  not  very  frequently. 

y.    Under  what  circumstances   have  you   been   in   the 
haliit  of  seeing  him? 

.1.    Only  in  the  way  of  business. 

Q.    What  is  your  business? 

.1.    I  am  engaged  in  the  tanning  business. 

(,K    ^^'hore   is  your  place  of  business? 

^1.    I  urn  located  at  Galena. 


REPORTING    STYLE. 


199 


(?i77^-J-yf^^J  Ae/^. 


^^ 


L 


j_ 


z^ 


>- 


cy 


^ 


-^ 


^^ 


^^ 


CHAPTER    IX. 


WRITING  EXERCISES. 
LESSON  I. 

A    PSALM    OF    LIFE. 

Tell  me  not  in  mournful  numbers, 
Life  is  but  an  empty  dream! 

For  the  soul  is  dead  that  slumbers, 
And  things  are  not  what  they  seem. 


^^--v 


/2- 


Life  is  real  !     Life  is  earnest  ! 

And  the  grave  is  not  its  goal; 
Dust  thou  art,  to  dust  returnest, 

Was  not  spoken  of  the  soul. 


Not  enjoyment,  and  not  sorrow, 
Is  our  destined  end  or  way; 


300 


REPORTING   STYLE.  201 

But  to  act  that  each  to-morrow 
Find  us  farther  than  to-day. 

Art  is  long  and  Time  is  fleeting, 

And  our  hearts,  though  stout  and  brave, 

Still,  like  muffled  drums,  are  beating 
Funeral  marches  to  the  grave. 

In  the  world's  broad  field  of  battle, 

In  the  bivouac  of  life. 
Be  not  like  dumb,  driven  cattle! 

Be  a  hero  in  the  strife! 

Trust  no  Future,  howe'er  pleasant! 

Let  the  dead  Past  bury  its  dead! 
Act — act  in  the  living  Present! 

Heart  within,  and  God  o'erhead! 

Lives  of  great  men  all  remind  us 

We  can  make  our  lives  sublime, 
And,  departing,  leave  behind  us 

Footprints  on  the  sands  of  time; — 

Footprints  that  perhaps  another, 

Sailing  o'er  life's  solemn  main, 
A  forlorn  and  shipwrecked  brother, 

Seeing,  shall  take  heart  again. 

Let  us,  then,  be  up  and  doing. 

With  a  heart  for  any  fate. 

Still  achieving,  still  pursuing, 

Learn  to  labor  and  to  wait. 

Henry  Wadsworth  LoNorELLow. 


202  ECLECTIC   SH0ilT-HA2JD. 


Gather  ye  rosebuds  as  ye  may, 

Old  Time  is  still  a  flying; 
And  this  same  hour  that  smiles  to-day, 

To-morrow  will  be  dying. 


Z. 


-f- 


J^ 


^—/^ 


The  glorious  lamp  of  heaven,  the  sun, 

The  higher  he's  a  getting, 
The  sooner  will  his  race  be  run, 

And  nearer  he's  to  setting. 

The  age  is  best  which  is  the  first, 

When  youth  and  blood  are  warmer; 

But  being  spent,  the  worse  or  worst 
Time  still  succeeds  the  former. 

Then  be  not  coy,  but  use  your  time. 
And  while  ye  may,  go  marry; 

For  having  lost  but  once  your  prime. 
You  may  forever  tarry. 

KOBEKT  HeHRICK. 


REPORTING   STYLE.  203 

LESSON  II. 

DISAPPOINTMENT    THE    LOT    OF    ALL. 

Uneasiness  and  disappointment  are  inseparable,  in  some 
degree,  fx'om  every  state  on  earth. 

Were  it  in  the  power  of  the  world  to  render  those  who 
attach  themselves  to  it  satisfied  and  happy,  you  might  then, 
I  admit,  have  some  title  to  complain  if  you  found  your- 
selves placed  upon  worse  terms  in  the  service  of  God.  But 
this  is  so  far  from  being  the  case  that,  among  the  multi- 
tude who  devote  themselves  to  earthly  pleasure,  you  will 
not  find  a  single  person  who  has  completely  attained  his  aim. 

Inquire  into  the  condition  of  the  high  and  the  low,  of 
the  gay  and  the  serious,  of  the  men  of  business  and  the 
men  of  pleasure,  and  you  shall  behold  them  all  occupied 
in  supplying  some  want,  or  in  removing  some  distress.  No 
man  is  pleased  with  being  precisely  what  he  is.  Everywhere 
there  is  a  void,  generally;  even  in  the  most  prosperous 
life,  there  is  some  corner  possessed  by  sorrow. 

He  who  is  engaged  in  business  pines  for  leisure.  He 
who  enjoys  leisure  languishes  for  want  of  employment. 
In  a  single  state  we  envy  the  comforts  of  a  family.  In 
conjugal  life  we  are  chagrined  by  domestic  cares.  In  a 
safe  station  we  regret  the  want  of  objects  for  enterprise. 
In  an  enterprising  life  we  lament  the  want  of  safety.  It 
is  the  doom  of  man  tliat  his  sky  should  never  be  free  from 
all  clouds.  He  is  at  present  in  an  exile  and  fallen  state. 
The  objects  which  surround  him  are  beneath  his  native 
dignity.  God  has  tinged  them  all  with  vanity  on  purpose 
to  make  hiiu  feel  that  this  is  not  his  rest;  that  here  he  is 
not  in  his  proper  place  nor  arrived  at  his  true  honor. 


204  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

NATIONAL    ANTHEM. 

Tko  little  brown  squirrel  hops  in  the  corn, 

The  cricket  quaintly  sings; 
The  emerald  pigeon  nods  his  head, 

And  the  shad  in  the  river  springs; 
The  dainty  sunflower  hangs  its  head 

On  the  shore  of  the  summer  sea; 
And  better  far  that  I  were  dead, 

If  Maud  did  not  love  me. 

1  love  the  squirrel  that  hops  in  the  corn, 

And  the  cricket  that  quaintly  srngs; 
And  the  emerald  pigeon  that  nods  his  head, 

And  the  shad  that  gaily  springs; 
I  love  the  dainty  sunflower,  too. 

And  Maud  with  lier  snowy  breast; 
I  love  them  all  —  but  I  love  —  I  love  — 

I  love  my  country  best. 

Thoius  Ballet  Aldhich. 

LESSON  III. 

SPRING. 

Dip  down  upon  the  northern  shore, 
0  sweet  new  year,  delaying  long; 
Thou  doest  exi^ectant  nature  wrong; 

Delaying  long,  delay  no  more. 

What  stays  thee  from  the  clouded  noons, 
Thy  sweetness  from  its  proper  place? 
Can  trouble  live  with  April  days, 

Or  sadnea^  in  tJie  summer  moons? 


BEPORTING   STYLE.  205 

Bring  orchis,  bring  the  foxglove  spire, 
The  little  speedwell's  darling  bine, 
Deep  tulips  dashed  with  fiery  dew, 

Laburnums,  dropping- wells  of  fire. 

0  thou  new  year,  delaying  long, 
Delayest  the  sorrow  in  my  blood 
That  longs  to  burst  from  a  frozen  bud, 

And  flood  a  fresher  throat  with  song. 

Now  fades  the  last  long  streak  of  snow; 
Now  bourgeons  every  maze  of  quick 
About  the  flowering  squares,  and  thick 

By  ashen  roots  the  violets  blow. 

Now  rings  the  woodland  loud  and  long, 
The  distance  takes  a  lovelier  hue, 
And  drowned  in  yonder  living  blue, 

The  lark  becomes  a  sightless  song. 

Now  dance  the  lights  on  lawn  and  lea, 
The  flocks  are  whiter  down  the  vale, 
And  milkier  every  milky  sail 

On  widening  stream  or  distant  sea. 

Where  now  the  seamew  pipes  or  dives. 
In  yonder  greening  gleam,  and  fly 
The  happy  birds,  that  change  their  sky 

To  build  and  brood,  that  live  their  lives. 

From  land  to  land,  and  in  my  breast, 
Spring  wakens  too;  and  my  regret 
Becomes  an  April  violet, 

And  buds  and  blossoms  like  the  rest. 

Alfred  Teitotson. 


206  ECLECTIC  SHORT-HAND. 

THE    RAINBOW. 

My  heart  leaps  up  when  I  behold 

A  rainbow  in  the  sky; 
So  was  it  when  my  life  began, 
So  is  it  now  I  am  a  man, 
So  be  it  when  I  shall  grow  old, 

Or  let  me  die! 
The  child  is  father  to  the  man; 

And  I  could  wish  my  days  to  be 

Bound  each  to  each  by  natural  piety. 

William  Wordsworth. 


REPORTING   STYLE.  207 

THE    MOSS    ROSE. 

The  angel  of  the  flowers,  one  day, 

Beneath  a  rose  tree  sleeping  lay, — 

That  spirit  to  whose  charge  'tis  given 

To  bathe  young  buds  in  dews  of  heaven 

Awakening  from  his  light  repose, 

The  angel  whispered  to  the  rose. 

"0  fondest  object  of  my  care. 

Still  fairest  found,  where  all  are  fair; 

For  the  sweet  shade  thou  givest  to  me 

Ask  what  thou  wilt,  'tis  granted  thee." 

"Then,"  said  the  rose,  with  deepened  glow, 

"  On  me  another  grace  bestow." 

The  spirit  paused  in  silent  thought. — 

What  grace  was  there  that  flower  had  not? 

'Twas  but  a  moment — o'er  the  rose 

A  veil  of  moss  the  angel  throws. 

And,  robed  in  nature's  simplest  weed. 

Could  there  a  flower  that  rose  exceed? 

Erumkacbeb. 

LESSON  IV. 

THE    LOVE    OF    GAIN. 

It  is  much  to  be  regretted  that,  in  the  present  state 
of  things,  there  is  no  period  of  man's  age  in  which  his 
virtue  is  not  exposed  to  perils.  Pleasure  lays  its  snares 
for  youth;  and  after  the  season  of  youthful  follies  is  past, 
other  temptations,  no  less  formidable  to  virtue,  presently 
arise.  The  love  of  pleasui-e  is  succeeded  by  the  passion 
for  intei-est.     In  this  passion  the  whole  mind  is  too  often 


208  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

absorbed,  and  the  change  thereby  induced  on  the  charac- 
ter is  of  no  amiable  kind.  Amidst  the  excesses  of  youth 
virtuous  affections  often  remain. 

The  attachments  of  friendship,  the  love  of  honor,  and 
the  warmth  of  sensibility  give  a  degree  of  luster  to  the 
character  and  cover  many  a  failing.  But  interest,  when 
it  is  become  the  ruling  principle,  both  debases  the  mind 
and  hardens  the  heart.  It  deadens  the  feelings  of  every- 
thing that  is  sublime  or  refined.  It  contracts  the  affec- 
tions within  a  narrow  circle,  and  extinguishes  all  those 
sparks  of  generosity  and  tenderness  which  once  glowed 
in  the  breast. 


BiJLlB. 


THOU    ART,    O    GOD. 

Thou  art,  0  God,  the  life  and  light 
Of  all  this  wondrous  world  we  see; 

Its  glow  by  daj^  its  smile  by  night. 

Are  but  reflections  caught  from  Thee. 

Where'er  we  turn  Thy  glories  shine, 

And  all  things  fair  and  bright  are  thine! 

When  da3%  with  farewell  beam,  delays 
Among  the  opening  clouds  of  even, 

And  we  can  almost  think  we  gaze 
Through  golden  vistas  into  heaven, 

Those  hues  that  make  the  sun's  decline 

So  soft,  so  radiant,  Lord,  are  thine. 

When  night  with  wings  of  starry  gloom 
O'ershadows  all  the  earth  and  skies 

Like  some  dark,  beauteous  bird,  whose  plume 
Is  sparkling  with  unniimbered  eyes, — 


REPOETING   STYLE.  209 

That  sacred  gloom,  those  fires  divine, 
So  grand,  so  countless,  Lord,  are  thine. 

When  youthful  spring  around  us  breathes, 
Thy  Spirit  warms  her  fragrant  sigh; 

And  every  flower  the  summer  wreathes 
Is  born  beneath  that  kindling  eye. 

Where'er  we  turn  thy  glories  shine. 

And  all  things  fair  and  bright  are  thine. 

MOORB. 

LESSON  V. 

FRAGMENT. 

And  sweet  it  is  to  see,  in  summer  time, 

The  daring  goats  upon  a  rocky  hill. 
Climb  here  and  there,  still  browsing  as  they  climb; 

While  far  below,  on  rugged   pipe  and  shrill, 
The  master  vents  his  pain;    or  homely  rhyme 

He  chants;  now  changing  place,  now  standing  still. 
While  his  beloved,  cold  of  heart,  and  stern, 

Looks  from  the  shade  in  sober  unconcern. 

Nor  less  another  sight  do  I  admire  — 

The  rural  family  round  their  hut  of  clay; 
Some  spread  the  table,  and  some  light  the  fire. 

Beneath  the  household  rock  in  open  day; 
The  ass's  colt  with  panniers  some  attire; 

Some  tend  the  bristly  hogs  with  fondling  play. 
This  with  delighted  heart  the  old  man  sees. 

Sits  out  of  doors  and  suns  himself  with  ease. 


210  ECLECTIC  SHORT-HAND. 

The  outward   image  speaks  the  inner  mind  — 

Peace  without  hatred,  which  no  care  can  fret; 
Entire  contentment  in  their  plow  they  find, 

Nor  home  return  until  the  sun  be  set; 
No  bolts  they  have,  their  houses  are  resigned 

To  Fortune  —  let  her  take  what  she  can  get. 
A  hearty  meal  fhen  crowns  the  happy  day, 

And  sound  sleep  follows  on  a  bed  of  hay. 

In  that  condition  Envy  is  unknown. 

And  haughtiness  was  never  there  a  guest; 
They  only  crave  some  meadow  ovei-grown 

With  herbage  that  is  greener  than  the  rest. 
The  plow's  a  sovereign  treasure  of  their  own. 

The  glittering  share  the  gem  they  deem  the  best; 
A  pair  of  panniers  serves  them  for  buffette. 

Trenchers  and  porringers  for  golden  plate. 

0  Avarice  blind,  0  mean  and  base  desires 

Of  those  who  pass  the  gifts  of  Nature  by! 
For  gold  alone  your  wretched  pride  aspires. 

Restless  for  gold  from  land  to  land  ye  fly. 
And  what  shall  quench  your  never  sated  fires. 

Ye  slaves  of   Envy,  Sloth,  and  Luxury, 
Who  think  not,  while  ye  plot  another's  wrong, 

"Man  wants  but  little,  nor  that  little  long?" 

They  in  old  time  who  drank  the  streamlet  clear, 
And  fed  upon  the  fruits  which  nature  sent, 

They  should  be  your  example,  should  appear 

Beacons  on  which  your  eyes  sliould  still  be  bent. 


tlEtORTlNO  STYLE.  211 

0  listen  to  my  voice  with  willing  ear! 

The  peasant  with  his  herds  enjoys  content; 
While  he  who  rules  the  world,  himself  unblest, 

Still  wants  and  wishes,  and  is  not  at  rest. 

Wealth,  sad  at  heart  the  while,  and  full  of  dread. 

Goes  all  adorned  with  gems,  and  gay  with  gold- 
And  every  cloud  which  passeth  overhead. 

As  ominous  of  change  doth  she  behold. 
But  Poverty  her  happy  days  hath  led. 

Vexed  with  no  hope  to  have,  nor  fear  to  hold; 
Amid  the  woods  in  homely  weeds  bedight, 

She  knows  no  cares,  no  quarrels,  no  aifright. 

Milk,  herbs  and  water  always  at  command. 

The  peasant  recks  not  of  superfluous  stores; 
He  counts  his  gains  upon  his  callous  hand. 

No  other  book  is  needed  for  his  scores; 
Troubled  with  no  account  of  shijxs  or  land, 

No  usurer's  guiles  he  suffers  and  deplores; 
He  knows  not  in  the  world  that  such  things  be. 

Nor  vainly  strives  with  fortune  —  no,  not  he. 

If  the  cow  calved,  and  if  the  yearling  grew, 

Enough  for  all  his  wishes  fortune  yields; 
He  honors  God,  and  fears  and  loves  him  too; 

His  prayers  are  for  his  flocks,  and  herds,  and  fields; 
The  doubt  —  the  how,  the  why,  that  fearful  crew, — 

Disturb  not  him,  whom  his  low  station  shields; 
And  favored    for  his  simple  truth  by  Heaven, 

The  little  that  he  humbly  asks  is  given. 

Michael  Anoelo. 


212  ECLECTIC  SHORT-HAND. 

LESSON  VI. 

REPLY    TO    HATNE. 
DANIEL  WEBSTER. 

The  eulogium  pronounced  on  the  character  of  the  State 
of  South  Carolina,  by  the  honorable  gentleman,  for  her 
revolutionaiy  and  other  merits,  meets  my  hearty  concur- 
rence. I  shall  not  acknowledge  that  the  honorable  mem- 
ber goes  before  me  in  regard  for  whatever  of  distinguished 
talent  or  distinguished  character  South  Carolina  has  pro- 
duced. I  claim  part  of  the  honor;  I  partake  in  the  pride 
of  her  great  names.  I  claim  them  for  my  countrymen, 
one  and  all, —  the  Laurenses,  the  Rutledges,  the  Pinkneys, 
the  Sumpters,  the  Marions, — Americans  all — whose  fame 
is  no  more  to  be  hemmed  in  by  state  lines,  than  their 
talents  and  patriotism  were  capable  of  being  circumscribed 
within  the  same  narrow  limits. 

In  their  day  and  generation  they  served  and  honored 
the  country,  and  the  whole  country,  and  their  renown 
is  of  the  treasures  of  the  whole  country.  Him,  whose 
honored  name  the  gentleman  himself  bears  —  does  he  deem 
me  less  capable  of  gratitude  for  his  patriotism,  or  sympathy 
for  his  sufferings,  than  if  his  CA'es  had  first  opened  upon  the 
light  in  Massachusetts  instead  of  South  Carolina?  Sir,  does 
he  suppose  it  in  his  power  to  exhibit  a  Carolina  name  so 
bright  as  to  produce  envy  in  my  bosom?  No,  sir;  increased 
gratification  and  delight  rather. 

I  thank  God  that,  if  I  am  gifted  with  little  of  the  spirit 
which  is  able  to  raise  mortals  to  the  skies,  I  have  yet  none, 
as  I  trust,  of  that  other  spirit  Avhich  would  drag  angels 
down.  When  I  shall  be  found,  sir,  in  my  place  here  in  the 
senate,   or  elsewhere,  to  sneer  at  public  merit,  because  it 


REPORTING   STYLE.  213 

happens  to  spring  up  beyond  the  little  limits  of  my  own 
state  or  neighborhood;  when  I  refuse  for  any  cause  the 
homage  due  to  American  talent,  to  elevated  patriotism,  to 
sincere  devotion  to  liberty  and  the  country;  or  if  I  see  an 
uncommon  endowment  of  Heaven,  if  I  see  extraordinary 
capacity  and  virtue  in  any  son  of  the  south,  and  if,  moved 
by  local  prejudice  or  gangrened  by  state  jealousy,  I  get  up 
here  to  abate  the  tithe  of  a  hair  from  his  just  character  and 
fame, —  may  my  tongue  cleave  to  the  roof  of  my  mouth! 

Sir,  let  me  recur  to  pleasing  recollections;  let  me  in- 
dulge in  refreshing  remembrances  of  the  past;  let  me  re- 
mind you  that,  in  early  times,  no  states  cherished  greater 
harmony,  both  of  principle  and  feeling,  than  Massachusetts 
and  South  Carolina.  Would  to  God  that  harmony  might 
again  return!  Shoulder  to  shoulder  they  went  through  the 
revolution;  hand  in  hand  they  stood  around  the  administra- 
tion of  Washington,  and  felt  his  own  great  arm  lean  on 
them  for  support.  Unkind  feeling, —  if  it  exists,  alienation 
and  distrust  are  the  growth.  They  are  weeds,  the  seeds  of 
which  that  same  great  arm  never  scattered. 

Mr.  President,  I  will  enter  on  no  encomium  upon 
Massachusetts;  she  needs  none.  There  she  is.  Behold 
her,  and  judge  for  yourselves.  There  is  her  history,  the 
world  knows  it  by  heart.  The  past  at  least  is  secure. 
There  is  Boston,  and  Concord,  and  Lexington,  and  Bunker 
Hill;  and  there  they  will  remain  forever.  The  bones  of 
her  sons  fallen  in  the  great  struggle  for  independence 
now  lie  mingled  with  the  soil  of  evei-y  state,  from  New 
England  to  Georgia;    and  there  they  will  lie  forever. 

And,  sir,  where  American  liberty  raised  its  first  voice, 
and  where  its  youth  was  mustered  and  sustained,  there 


214  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

it  still  lives  in  the  strength  of  its  manhood,  and  full  of 
its  original  spirit.  If  discord  and  disunion  shall  wound 
it;  if  party  strife  and  blind  ambition  shall  hawk  at  and 
tear  it;  if  folly  and  madness,  if  uneasiness  under  salutary 
and  necessary  restraint,  shall  succeed  in  separating  it 
from  that  union  by  which  alone  its  existence  is  made 
sure,  it  will  stand  in  the  end  by  the  side  of  that  cradle 
in  which  its  infancy  was  rocked;  it  will  stretch  forth  its 
arm  with  whatever  of  vigor  it  may  still  retain  over  the 
friends  who  gather  around  it;  and  it  will  fall  at  last,  if 
fall  it  must,  amid  the  profoundest  monuments  of  its  own 
glory,  and  on  the  very  spot  of  its  origin. 
LESSON  VII. 

MOTION    OF    THE    HEAVENLY    BODIES. 

THOMAS   DICK. 

Having  taken  a  cui-sory  view  of  the  magnitude  of 
the  numberless  bodies  scattered  through  the  regions  of 
space,  let  us  now  consider  the  motions  which  are  inces- 
santly going  forward  in  every  part  of  the  universe,  for 
all  the  myriads  of  globes  and  systems  to  which  we  have 
alluded  are  in  rapid  and  perpetual  motion;  and  we  have 
no  reason  to  believe  that  there  is  a  single  quiescent 
body  throughout  the  immensity  of  creation.  We  have 
here  planets  revolving  around  suns,  planets  revolv- 
ing around  planets,  suns  performing  their  revolutions 
around  suns,  suns  revolving  around  the  centers  of 
sidereal  systems,  and  in  all  probability  every  system  of 
creation  revolving  around  the  center  and  Grand  Mover 
of  the  whole.  The  rate  of  these  motions,  in  every 
known  instance,  is  not  less  than  several  thousands  of 
miles    every    hour,    and    in  many  instances    thousands    of 


REPORTING   STYLE.  21 5 

miles  in  a  minute.  The  motions  which  are  found  among 
the  planetary  globes  appear  at  first  view  altogether 
astonishing  and  almost  to  exceed  belief,  when  we  con- 
sider the  enormous  size  of  these  bodies.  That  a  globe  a 
thousand  times  larger  than  our  world  should  fly  at  the 
rate  of  thirty  thousand  miles  an  hour,  and  carry  along 
with  it  a  retinue  of  other  mighty  globes  in  its  swift 
career,  is  an  object  that  may  well  strike  us  with  wonder 
and  amazement.  But  the  fixed  stars  —  though  to  a  com- 
mon observer  they  ajjpear  exactly  in  the  same  position 
with  regard  to  each  other  —  are  found  in  some  instances 
to  be  carried  forward  with  motions  far  more  rapid  than 
even  the  bodies  of  the  planetary  system,  though  their 
magnitude  is  immensely  superior.  We  have  already  seen 
that  the  star  61  Cygni,  whose  apparent  motion  is  five 
seconds  annually,  and  consequently  imperceptible  to  a 
common  observer,  yet  at  the  distance  at  which  the  star 
is  known  to  be  placed,  this  motion  is  equivalent  to  one 
thousand  five  hundred  and  fifty-two  millions  of  miles  in 
a  year,  four  millions  two  hundred  and  fifty-two  thousand 
miles  a  day,  and  one  hundred  and  seventy-seven  thousand 
miles  an  hovir.  Other  stars  are  found  to  move  with 
velocities  similar,  as  Cassiopeia,  which  moves  above  three 
millions  of  miles  a  day,  which  is  at  the  rate  of  two 
thousand  one  hundred  and  sixty  miles  every  minute. 
These  are  motions  altogether  incomprehensible  by  human 
beings,  especially  when  we  take  into  consideration  the 
enormous  magnitude  of  the  stars,  some  of  which  may  be 
a  thousand  times  larger  than  all  the  planets  and  comets 
belonging  to  our  system.  They  display  the  amazing  and 
uncontrollable   energies   of  omnipotence,  and   afford  a  dis- 


216  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

tinct  source  of  admiration  and  astonishment  in  addition 
to  all  the  other  wonders  of  the  universe.  If,  then,  we 
would  endeavor  to  obtain  a  comprehensive  idea  of  the 
motions  going  forward  throughout  the  spaces  of  immen- 
sity, we  must  not  only  conceive  of  planets  revolving 
around  luminous  centers,  but  of  suns  revolving  around 
suns, —  of  suns  and  systems  revolving  around  the  centers 
of  the  nebulae  to  which  they  respectively  belong,  —  of 
all  the  systems  and  nebulae  of  the  universe  revolving 
in  immense  circumferences  around  the  throne  of  the 
Eternal,  the  great  center  of  all  worlds  and  beings, —  of 
each  sun,  and  planet  and  system,  notwithstanding,  pursu- 
ing a  course  of  its  own  in  diiferent  directions,  and  in 
numerous  instances  acted  upon  by  different  forces, —  in 
short,  of  the  ten  thousand  times  ten  thousands  of  lumi- 
nous and  opaque  globes  of  every  rank  and  order  within 
the  circuit  of  creation,  all  performing  their  rapid  but 
harmonious  motions  throughout  every  region  of  space, 
and  without  intermission,  in  obedience  to  the  laws  of 
their  Creator. 

LESSO:^  VIII. 

WE    CHERISH    THE    MEMORY    OF    OUR    HONORED    DEAD. 

EDWARD   EVERETT. 

It  has  been  the  custom,  from  the  remotest  antiquity, 
to  preserve,  and  to  posterity,  in  bronze  and  in  marble,  the 
counterfeit  presentment  of  illustrious  men.  Within  the 
last  few  years  modern  research  has  brought  to  light,  on 
the  banks  of  the  Tigris,  huge  slabs  of  alabaster,  buried 
for  ages,  which  exhibit,  in  relief,  the  faces  and  the  per- 
sons of  men  who  ^-overned  the  primeval  East  in  the  gray 


REPORTING   STYLE.  217 

dawn  of  history.  Three  thousand  years  have  elapsed  since 
they  lived,  and  reigned,  and  built  palaces,  and  fortified 
cities,  and  waged  war,  and  gained  victories  of  which  the 
trophies  are  carved  upon  these  monumental  tablets, —  the 
triumphal  procession,  the  chariots  laden  with  spoil,  the 
drooping  captive,  the  conquered  monarch  in  chains, —  but 
the  legends  inscribed  upon  the  stone  are  imperfectly  de- 
ciphered, and  little  beyond  the  names  of  the  personages, 
and  the  most  general  tradition  of  their  exploits,  is  pre- 
served. 

In  like  manner  the  obelisks  and  the  temples  of  ancient 
Egypt  are  covered  with  the  sculptured  images  of  whole 
dynasties  of  Pharaohs — older  than  Moses,  older  than  Joseph, 
whose  titles  are  recorded  in  the  hieroglyphics  with  which 
the  granite  is  charged,  and  which  are  gradually  yielding 
up  their  long  concealed  mysteries  to  the  sagacity  of  modern 
criticism.  The  plastic  arts,  as  they  passed  into  Hellas, 
with  all  the  other  arts  which  give  grace  and  dignity  to 
our  nature,  reached  a  perfection  unknown  to  Egypt  or 
Assyria;  and  the  heroes  and  sages  of  Greece  and  Rome, 
immortalized  by  the  sculptor,  still  people  the  galleries  and 
museums  of  the  modern  world. 

In  every  succeeding  age,  and  in  every  country  in  which 
the  fine  arts  have  been  cultivated,  the  respect  and  affection 
of  survivors  have  found  a  pure  and  rational  gratification 
in  the  historical  portrait  and  the  monumental  statue  of  the 
honored  and  loved  in  private  life,  and  especially  of  the 
great  and  good  who  have  deserved  well  of  their  country. 
Public  esteem  and  confidence,  and  private  affection,  the  gi'at- 
itude  of  the  community  and  the  fond  memories  of  the  fire- 
side,   have  ever  sought,  in  this  way,  to  prolong  the  sensible 


218  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

existence  of  their  beloved  and  respected  objects.  What, 
though  the  dear  and  honored  features  and  persons  on  which, 
while  living,  we  never  gazed  without  tenderness  or  vener- 
ation, have  been  taken  from  us,  —  something  of  the  majesty 
abides  in  the  portrait,  the  bust,  and  the  statue.  The  heart 
bereft  of  the  living  originals  turns  to  them ;  and,  cold  and 
silent  as  they  are,  they  strengthen  and  animate  the  cherished 
recollections  of  the  loved,  the  honored,  and  the  lost. 

The  skill  of  the  painter  and  sculptor,  which  thus  comes 
in  aid  of  the  memory  and  imagination,  is,  in  its  highest  de- 
gree, one  of  the  rarest,  as  it  is  one  of  the  most  exquisite, 
accomplishments  within  our  attainment,  and  in  its  per- 
fection as  seldom  witnessed  as  the  perfection  of  speech  or 
music.  The  plastic  hand  must  be  moved  by  the  same 
ethereal  instinct  as  the  eloquent  lips  or  the  recording 
pen. 

The  number  of  those  who,  in  the  language  of  Michael 
Angelo,  can  discern  the  finished  statue  in  the  heart  of  the 
shapeless  block,  and  bid  it  start  into  artistic  life,  who  are 
endowed  with  the  exquisite  gift  of  molding  the  rigid 
bronze  or  the  lifeless  marble  into  graceful,  majestic  and 
expressive  forms,  is  not  greater  than  the  number  of  those 
who  are  able,  with  equal  majesty,  grace  and  expressive- 
ness, to  make  the  spiritual  essence,  the  finest  shades  of 
thought  and  feeling,  sensible  to  the  mind,  through  the  eye 
and  the  ear,  in  the  mysterious  embodiment  of  the  writ- 
ten and  the  spoken  word.  If  Athens,  in  her  palmiest 
days,  had  but  one  Pericles,  she  had  also  but  one  Phidias. 

Xor  are  these  beautiful  and  noble  arts,  by  which  the 
face  and  the  form  of  the  departed  are  preserved  to  us, 
calling  into  the  highest  exercise,  as  they  do,  all   the  irai- 


REPORTINfi    STVLK.  219 

tativc  and  idealizing  powers  of  the  painter  and  the  seulp- 
tor,  the  least  instructive  of  our  teachers.  The  portraits 
and  the  statues  of  the  honored  dead  kindle  the  generous 
ambition  of  the  youthful  aspirant  to  fame.  Themistocles 
could  not  sleep  for  the  trophies  in  tlie  C'eramicus;  and 
when  the  living  Demosthenes  had  ceased  to  speak,  the 
stony  lips  remained  to  rebuke  and  exhort  his  degenerate 
countrymen.  More  than  a  hundred  years  have  elapsed 
since  tlie  great  Xewton  passed  away:  but.  from  age  to 
age.  his  statue,  by  Koubillac.  in  the  antechapel  of  Trinity 
College,  will  give  distinctness  to  the  conceptions  formed 
of  him  by  hundreds  and  thousands  of  ardent,  youthful 
spirit>,  filled  with  reverence  for  that  transcendent  intel- 
lect which,  from  the  phenomena  that  fall  within  our 
limited  virion,  deduced  the  imi»erial  law  by  which  the 
sovereign  mind  i'ule<  the  entire  universe.  We  can  never 
look  on  the  }ier-on  of  Wasliington:  but  his  serene  and 
Udlile  counteiuiUL-e.  prrpetuated  by  the  prnuil  and  the  chisel, 
i-  familiar  to  far  greater  )nultitudes  than  ever  stood  in 
his  living  presence,  and  will  l)e  thus  familiar  to  the  latest 
generation. 

\MKit  parent.  a>  he  conduct^  lii<  son  to  Mount  Auburn 
or  to  Hunki/r  Hill,  will  not.  as  he  pa-ses  before  their 
monumental  ,-tatue>.  >er'k  to  heighten  his  reverence  for 
vii'tue.  for  iiatrioti>m.  for  science,  for  learning,  for  devo- 
tion to  tlie  ))ublic  good,  as  he  bids  him  contemplate  the 
fiirm  oi  that  grave  and  venerable  Winthriip.  who  left  his 
plea-ant  home  in  England  to  come  and  found  a  new  re- 
luiblii-  in  thi-  untrodden  wilderne«:  of  that  ardent  and 
intrepid  nri-.  \v]u>  }ir>t  .-truck  out  the  s^uirk  of  American 
indcjiendence:    of    that    nolde    Adams,   its    most    eloquent 


220  ECLECTIC    SHORT-HAXD. 

chamijion  on  the  floor  of  Congress;  of  that  martyr,  War- 
ren, who  laid  down  his  life  in  its  defense;  of  that  self- 
taught  Bowditch,  who,  without  a  guide,  threaded  the  starry 
mazes  of  the  heavens;  of  that  Story,  honored  at  home  and 
abroad  as  one  of  the  brightest  luminaries  of  the  law,  and, 
by  a  felicity  of  which  I  believe  there  is  no  other  exam- 
ple, admirably  portrayed  in  marble  by  his  son? 

What  citizen  of  Boston,  as  he  accompanies  the  stran- 
ger around  our  streets,  guiding  him  through  our  busy 
thoroughfares,  to  our  wharves  crowded  with  vessels  which 
range  every  sea  and  gather  the  produce  of  every  climate, 
up  to  the  dome  of  this  capitol,  which  commands  as  lovely 
a  landscape  as  can  delight  the  eye  or  gladden  the  heart, 
will  not,  as  he  calls  his  attention,  at  last,  to  the  statues 
of  Franklin  and  Webster,  exclaim,  "  Boston  takes  pride 
in  her  natural  position,  she  rejoices  in  her  beautiful  envi- 
rons, she  is  grateful  for  her  material  prosperity;  but, 
richer  than  the  merchandise  stored  in  palatial  ware- 
houses, greener  than  the  slopes  of  sea-girt  islets,  lovelier 
than  this  encircling  panorama  of  land  and  sea,  of  field 
and  hamlet,  of  lake  and  stream,  of  garden  and  grove,  is 
the  memor}^  of  her  sons,  native  and  adopted,  the  charac- 
ter, services  and  fame  of  those  who  have  benefited  and 
adorned  their  day  and  generation.  Our  children  and  the 
schools  at  which  they  are  trained,  our  citizens  and  the 
services  they  have  rendered  —  these  are  our  jewels,  these 
our  abiding  treasures."' 

Yes,  your  lonq-  rows  of  quarried  granite  may  crum- 
ble to  the  (lust:  the  cornfields  in  yonder  villages  I'ipen- 
ing  to  the  sickle  may.  like  the  plains  of  stricken  Lom- 
bardy  a  few  weeks  ago,  be  kneaded  into  bloody  clods  by 


REPORTING  STYLE.  221 

the  maddening  wheels  of  artillery;  this  populous  city, 
like  the  old  cities  of  Etruria  and  Campagna  Roniagna, 
may  be  desolated  by  the  pestilence  that  walketh  in  dark- 
ness, may  decay  with  the  lapse  of  time,  and  the  busy  mart 
which  now  rings  with  the  joyous  din  of  trade,  become  as 
lonely  or  still  as  Carthage  or  Tyre,  as  Babylon  or  Nin- 
eveh ;  but  the  names  of  the  great  and  good  shall  survive 
the  desolation  and  the  ruin ;  the  memory  of  the  wise,  the 
brave,  the  patriotic,  shall  never  perish. 

Yes,  Sparta  is  a  wheat-field;  a  Bavarian  prince  holds 
court  at  the  foot  of  the  Acropolis;  the  traveling  virtuoso 
digs  for  marble  in  the  Roman  Forum,  and  beneath  the 
ruins  of  the  temple  of  Jupiter  Capitolarius ;  but  Lycur- 
gus  and  Leonidas,  and  Miltiades  and  Demosthenes,  and 
Cato  and  Tully  "still  live,"  and  He*  still  lives,  and  all 
the  great  and  good  shall  live  in  the  heart  of  ages  while 
marble  and  bronze  shall  endure;  and  when  marble  and 
bronze  shall  have  perished,  they  shall  "  still  live "  in 
memory,  so  long  as  men  shall  reverence  law,  and  honor 
patriotism,  and  love  liberty! 

LESSON  IX. 

COMPLETE    EDUCATIOX  :     AN    ADDRESS    DELIVEKED    AT    THE 
OPENING    OF    A    NEW    COLLEGE    EDIFICE. 

JOSEPH  CROSS. 

In  the  fairest  of  Italian  cities  stands  the  finest  of  ter- 
restrial structures  —  a  campanile  or  bell-tower,  twenty- 
five  feet  square,  two  liundred  and  seventy-three  feet  high, 
built  of   white   and  colored   marble    in    alternate    blocks, 

*  Daniel  Webster. 


222  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAKD. 

covered  with  a  royal  luxuriance  of  scuipture  framed  in 
medallions,  studded  everywhere  with  the  most  beautiful 
statuary  disposed  in  Gothic  niches,  and  finished  from  base 
to  battlement  like  a  lady's  cabinet  inlaid  with  pearl  and 
gold.  It  would  seem  as  if  nothing  more  perfect  in  sym- 
metry, more  exquisite  in  workmanship,  or  more  magnifi- 
cent in  ornamentation,  could  possibly  be  achieved  by  hu- 
man genius.  Pure  as  a  lily  born  of  dew  and  sunshine, 
the  approaching  tourist  sees  it  rising  over  the  lofty  roof 
of  the  Duomo,  like  the  pillar  of  cloud  upon  the  taberna- 
cle; and  when  he  enters  the  Piazza,  and  finds  it  standing 
apart  in  its  majestic  altitude,  and  looking  down  upon  the 
vestal  loveliness  of  the  Tuscan  Santa  Maria,  he  can  think 
only  of  the  Angel  of  the  Annunciation  in  the  presence 
of  the  Blessed  Virgin.  Whoever  has  gazed  upon  its  grand 
proportions,  and  studied  the  details  of  its  exquisite  exe- 
cution, will  feel  no  astonishment  at.  being  told  that  such 
a  structure  could  not  now  be  built  in  this  country  for 
less  than  fifty  millions  of  our  money;  nor  will  he  won- 
der that  Jarvis,  in  his  Art  Hints,  has  pronounced  it  "  the 
noblest  specimen  of  tower-architecture  the  world  has  to 
show":  that  Charles  the  Fifth  declared  it  was  "fit  to  be 
inclosed  with  crystal,  and  exhibited  only  on  holydays"; 
and  that  the  Florentines  themselves,  whenever  they  would 
characterize  anything  as  extremely  beautiful,  say  it  is  "  as 
fine  as  the  Campanile." 

Gentlemen,  you  have  reared  a  nobler  edifice!  Nobler, 
not  because  more  costly,  for  your  pecuniary  outlay  is  as 
nothing  in  the  comparison.  Nobler,  not  because  the  ma- 
terial is  more  precious,  and  the  architecture  more  perfect; 
for  what  is  a  pile  of  lirick  to  such  a  miracle  in  marble? 


REPOHTIXG    STVIJ;.  22o 

or  where  is  the  American  liuihhn-  that  would  dream  of 
competing  with  Giotto?  Nobler,  not  because  there  is  a 
larger  and  richer-toned  bell  in  the  gilded  cupola,  to  sum- 
mon the  inmates  to  study  and  recitation,  or  to  morning 
and  evening  worship;  for  the  Santa  Reparata,  in  the 
highest  story  of  the  Campanile,  is  one  of  the  grandest 
pieces  of  resonant  metal  ever  cast:  and  its  voice,  though 
soft  as  Hute-tones  at  eventide  coming  over  the  water,  is 
rich  and  majestic  as  an  angel's  song.  Far  nobler,  how- 
ever, in  its  purpose  and  utility:  for  that  wonder  of  Italian 
architecture  is  the  product  of  Florentine  pride  and  van- 
ity in  the  days  of  a  prosperous  republic  —  a  less  massive 
but  more  elegant  Tower  of  Babel,  expressing  the  ambi- 
tion of  its  Iniilders:  and  though  standing  in  the  Cathe- 
dral Piazza,  its  chief  conceivable  objects  are  mere  show 
and  stnind:  while  tlie  end  and  aim  of  this  editice  is  the 
developiuiMit  of  mind,  the  formation  nf  character,  the  cre- 
ation of  a  loftier  intellectual  manhood,  the  reproduction 
(if  so  much  of  the  L. i>t  image  of  (rod  as  may  be  evolved 
by  the  ])est   media  and  methods  of  luiman   education. 

The  excellence  of  y(MU'  structure,  then,  consists  main- 
ly in  thi^  —  that  it  i<  only  a  scatl'old.  with  derricks,  wind- 
lasses, and  otlier  apparatus  and  implements,  fir  building 
something  immeasurably  more  excellent.  Here  the  think- 
ing power  is  \o  he  quickeneil.  and  the  Ligical  facitlty  is 
to  be  awakened  and  invigorated.  This  is  to  be  eftected. 
not  so  much  l\v  the  kiiowledge  acquired,  as  by  the  effort 
called  out  for  its  acquisition.  'Yho  teacher  is  to  meastire 
his  sitccess.  net  l>v  the  numl>cr  and  variety  of  t^'rms. 
rules,  f  irmulas  and  principles  he  lias  im[ire>-ed  uj^on  tlie 
niemorv.  but  bv    the   amount    of    mental    iiower    and    inde- 


224'  ECLECTIC  SHORT-HAKD. 

pendence  he  has  imparted  to  his  pupil.  True,  in  educat- 
ing the  mind,  knowledge  of  some  sort  must  be  acquired; 
but  the  thoroughness  of  the  education  depends  no  more 
Upon  the  quantity  of  the  acquisition,  than  the  health  of 
the  guest  upon  the  abundance  of  the  banquet.  The  men- 
tal food,  as  well  as  the  material,  must  be  digested  and 
assimilated.  It  follows  that  those  exercises  which  require 
close  and  consecutive  thinking,  thorough  analysis,  clear 
discrimination  and  accurate  definition,  are  best  adapted 
to  develop  the  higher  faculties  of  the  mind.  Mathemat- 
ics, metaphysics,  dialectics  and  philology  must  form  the 
granite  basis  of  your  building,  sustaining  the  solid  tiers 
of  rich  and  varied  marbles. 

Then  comes  the  aesthetic  culture.  First  the  substan- 
tial, afterward  the  ornamental  —  this  is  the  natural  order, 
to  reverse  which  were  to  begin  building  the  tower  at  the 
top.  The  very  idea  of  the  ornamental  supposes  something 
substantial  to  be  ornamented.  No  man  will  attempt  to 
polish  the  sponge,  or  paint  a  picture  on  the  vacant  air, 
or  rear  a  stone  cathedral  on  a  sunset  cloud.  There  is 
no  lily-bloom  without  the  sustaining  stalk,  nor  magnolia 
grandiflora  without  the  sturdy  and  stately  tree.  "  Wood^ 
hay,  stubble,"  are  not  fit  materials  for  jewelry;  but 
"gold,  silver,  precious  stones,""  may  be  wrought  into  a 
thousand  forms  of  beauty,  sparkling  with  myriad  splen- 
dors. The  solid  marble  superstructure  resting  upon  its 
deep  foundations  of  granite,  firm  as  the  seated  hills,  can 
scarcely  be  too  finely  finished  or  too  sumptuously 
adorned.  Upon  a  thorough  mental  culture  sit  grace- 
fully, and  quite  at  home,  philosophy,  history,  poetry, 
eloquence,     music,     painting  —  all    in    literature    and    the 


REPORTING   STYLE.  225 

arts  that  can  refine  the  taste,  refresh  the  heart,  and 
lead  the  fancy  captive.  To  the  mind  thus  disciplined 
and  adorned  a  pleasant  path  is  opened  to  the  broadest  and 
richest  fields  of  intellectual  inquiry,  where  it  may  range 
at  will  with  the  freedom  of  an  angel's  wing,  charmed 
with  beauties  such  as  Eden  never  knew,  thrilled  with 
melodies  such  as  the  leaden  ear  of  ignorance  never 
heard,  rejoicing  in  a  fellowship  of  wisdom  worthy  of  the 
enfranchised  sons  of  God,  and  realizing  the  truth  so 
finely  expressed  by  the  greatest  of  German  poets: 

Only  through  beauty's  morning  gate, 
Canst  thou  to  knowledge  penetrate; 
The  mind,  to  face  truth's  higher  glances, 
Must  swim  some  time  in  beauty's  trances; 
The  heavenly  harping  of  the  muses, 

Whose  sweetest  trembling  through  thee  rings, 
A  higher  life  into  thy  soul  infuses, 

And  wings  it  upward  to  the  soul  of  things. 

But  is  there  not  something  still  better,  which  ought 
to  be  an  element  in  every  process  of  human  education? 
What  is  man?  Merely  an  intellectual  animal?  Nay, 
but  he  has  a  spirit  within  him  allied  to  angels  and  to 
God.  The  higher  nature  calls  for  culture  no  less  than 
the  lower.  To  the  development  and  discipline  of  the 
rational  and  aesthetic  faculties  must  be  subjoined  "  the 
nurture  and  admonition  of  the  Lord."  Otherwise  we 
educate  only  the  inferior  part  of  the  man,  and  leave  the 
superior  to  chance  and  the  devil.  Make  scholars  of  your 
children,  but  do  not  omit  to  make  them  christians. 
Lead  them  to  Parnassus,  but  let  them  go  by  the  way 
of    Calvary.     Conduct    them    to    Olympus,    but    let    them 


226  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAKD. 

carry  the  dew  of  Olivet  upon  their  sandals.  Make  them 
drink  deeply  from  the  wells  of  human  wisdom,  but  deny 
them  not  the  living  water  whereof  if  one  drink  he  shall 
never  thirst  again. 

Why  should  a  "  wise  master  builder "  hesitate  to 
connect  religion  with  science  and  literature  in  the  edifi- 
cation and  adornment  of  the  soul?  Does  not  religion 
favor  the  most  thorough  mental  discipline  and  contribute 
to  the  harmonious  development  of  all  the  spiritual 
powers?  Does  not  Christianity  stimulate  the  mind  to 
struggle  against  difficulties,  ennoble  the  struggle  by 
investing  it  with  the  dignity  of  a  duty,  and  render  the 
duty  delightful  by  the  hope  of  a  heavenly  reward? 
"Knowledge  is  power";  but  what  knowledge  is  so 
mighty  as  that  which  Christ  brought  from  the  bosom  of 
the  Father?  Poetry  and  philosophy  have  their  charms; 
but  what  poetry  is  like  that  of  the  Holy  Spirit,  and 
what  philosophy  like  that  of  Redeeming  Love?  God's 
Holy  Evangel  enlarges  and  strengthens  the  mind  by 
bringing  it  into  contact  with  the  sublimest  truths,  and 
making  it  familiar  with  the  profoundest  mysteries.  It 
rectifies  our  perverted  reason,  corrects  our  erroneous 
estimates,  silences  the  imperious  clamor  of  the  passions, 
and  removes  the  stern  embargo  which  the  corrupt  heart 
lays  upon  the  aspiring  intellect.  It  sings  us  the  sweet- 
est songs,  preaches  to  us  the  purest  morality,  and  pre- 
sents for  our  imitation  the  noblest  examples  of  benefi- 
cence and  self-denial.  Under  its  blessed  influence  the 
soul  expands  to  grasp  the  thought  of  God  and  receive 
the  infinite  riches  of  his  love. 

And  shall  we  wrong  our  sons  and  daughter's  by  with- 


REtonTING   STYLB.  227 

holding  from  them  thi.s  noblest  agency  of  the  higher 
mental  and  spiritual  culture  — 

The  fountain-light  of  all  our  day, 
The  master-light  of  all  our  seeing — 

and  turn  them  over,  with  all  their  instinctive  yearnings 
after  the  true,  the  good,  the  pure,  the  divine,  to  the  blind 
guidance  of  a  skeptical  sciolism,  and  the  bewildering 
vagaries  of  a  rationalistic  infidelity?  "No,"  to  use  the 
language  of  the  late  Canon  Melville,  "  We  will  not  yield 
the  culture  of  the  understanding  to  earthly  husbandmen; 
there  are  heavenly  ministers  who  water  it  with  a  choicer 
dew,  and  pour  upon  it  the  beams  of  a  brighter  sun,  and 
prune  its  branches  with  a  kinder  and  more  skillful  hand. 
We  will  not  give  up  the  reason  to  stand  always  as  a 
priestess  at  the  altars  of  human  philosophy;  she  hath  a 
more  majestic  temple  to  tread,  and  more  beautiful  robes 
to  walk  in,  and  incense  rarer  and  more  fragrant  to  offer 
in  golden  censers.  She  does  well  when  boldly  exploring 
God's  visible  works;  she  does  better  when  she  submits  to 
spiritual  teaching,  and  sits  with  Mary  at  the  Savior's 
feet." 

Gentlemen,  it  is  impossible  to  overstate  the  importance 
of  religious  culture  in  the  work  of  education.  Every  in- 
terest of  time  and  eternity  urges  it  upon  your  attention. 
Your  children  are  accountable  and  immortal  creatures. 
"  Give  them  Divine  truth,"  says  Channing,  "  and  you  give 
them  more  than  gems  and  gold;  give  them  Christian 
principles,  and  you  give  them  more  than  thrones  and 
diadems;  imbue  their  hearts  with  a  love  of  virtue,  and 
you  enrich  them  more  than  by  la^'ing  worlds  at  their 
feet,"     Your   doctrine    may   distill    as    the    dew  upon  the 


228  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

grass,  and  as  the  small  rain  upon  the  tender  herb;  but 
in  some  future  emergency  of  life,  the  silent  influence 
shall  assert  itself  in  a  might  more  irresistible  than  the 
stormy  elements  when  they  go  forth  to  the  battles  of  God. 
If  the  work  be  faithfully  done,  the  impression  produced 
shall  not  be  that  of  the  sea-fowl  on  the  sand,  eS'aced  by 
the  first  wave  of  the  rising  tide;  but  the  enduring  grooves 
cut  by  the  chanot-wheels  of  the  King  of  Trembling  as  he 
rides  through  the  mountain  ranges,  and  the  footprints  of 
his  fiery  steeds  left  deep  in  the  everlasting  rocks. 

Forward,  then,  with  your  noble  endeavor!  You  are 
building  for  eternity.  You  are  rearing  temples  of  living 
stones  which  shall  survive  all  the  changes  and  chances  of 
earth  and  time,  and  look  sublimely  down  upon  the  world's 
catastrophe.  Up !  up  with  your  immortal  campanile !  It  is 
compacted  of  imperishable  gems,  cemented  with  gold  from 
the  mines  of  God.  No  marble  sculpture  may  adorn  its 
niches  and  cornices;  but  angel  forms  shall  walk  its  bat- 
tlements in  robes  of  living  glory.  No  hollow  metal  may 
swing  in  its  vaulted  logie,  sending  sweet  echoes  over  the 
distant  hills,  and  charming  the  song-birds  to  silence  along 
the  flowery  Val  d'Arno;  but  richer  and  holier  melodies, 
ringing  out  from  its  heavenly  altitudes,  shall  mingle  with 
the  music  of  the  spheres,  and  swell  the  many-voiced  har- 
mony of  the  City  of  God  I 


CHAPTER  X. 


THE  AMANUENSIS. 

A  PERSON  who  writes  short-hand  in  an  office  for  a  busi- 
ness, or  a  literary  man,  is  called  an  amanuensis.  The  work 
that  he  does  is  that  of  writing  letters,  contracts,  business 
papers,  and  various  memoranda,  or  manuscript  for  ser- 
mons, pleas,  speeches,  and  books,  in  short-hand,  from  dic- 
tation, either  transcribing  them  by  writing  them  out  in 
long-hand  or  on  the  writing  machine,  or  filing  them  for 
future  reference.  He  also  frequently  writes  the  conversa- 
tions which  occur  between  his  employer  and  persons  who 
have  called  to  talk  business  with  him. 

The  uses  which  are  thus  made  of  the  amanuensis  are 
not  confined  to  any  particular  kind  of  business,  but  are 
general,  in  banks,  insurance  offices,  commission  houses, 
manufacturers'  offices,  publishing  houses,  railway  offices, 
agencies,  newspaper  offices,  lawyers'  offices,  and  the  studies 
of  ministers,  literary  and  scientific  men.  Indeed,  it  is 
almost  impossible  to  enumerate  the  various  departments  of 
activity  in  which  the  amanuensis  and  his  art  have  become 
most  important  agencies  for  facilitating  the  expression  and 
transmission  of  thought.    ^ 

The  chief  part  of  the  commercial  amanuensis'  work 
consists  in  taking  letters  from  dictation.  The  correspond- 
ence of  a  large  business  house  involves  great  labor.  Before 
the  use  of  short-hand  was  applied  to  it,  every  correspondent 

229 


230  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

for  a  house  required  a  thorough  knowledge  of  the  business, 
and  often  a  house  employed  several  correspondents  who 
devoted  their  entii*e  time  to  answering  letters  by  means  of 
the  pen.  Now,  a  single  correspondent,  aided  by  a  short- 
hand clerk  with  his  writing  machine,  can  easily  do  the 
work  which  formerly  required  sevei-al  correspondents. 
The  morning  mail  of  a  house  is  received.  The  correspond- 
ent opens  letter  after  letter,  quietly  dictates  their  answers 
to  his  stenographer,  and,  often,  in  an  hour's  time,  the  re- 
plies to  fifty  or  one  hundx-ed  letters  have  been  dictated. 
Having  thus  disposed  of  the  morning's  mail,  the  corre- 
spondent is  at  liberty  to  devote  his  attention  to  other 
important  matters  connected  with  the  business  until  the 
arrival  of  another  mail,  while  the  amanuensis  proceeds  to 
transcribe  in  long-hand  or  by  the  writing  machine  the  let- 
ters from  his  short-hand  notes,  making  copies  of  such  as 
need  to  be  preserved,  and  preparing  all  for  the  mail.  If 
the  time  of  the  amanuensis  is  not  all  occupied  in  doing  his 
regular  shorthand  and  transcribing  work  he  is  employed  in 
filing  letters,  writing  circulars,  assisting  on  the  books,  mak- 
ing bills,  doing  collecting,  attending  to  telegrams,  etc.,  by 
which  means  he  has  an  excellent  opportunity  of  becoming 
acquainted  with  the  various  details  of  practical  business 
life. 

Qr.VLlKlLATIOXS. 

Character,—  \^  a  foundation  the  amanuensis  must  be 
possessed  of  character,  so  that  he  will  feel  the  responsibili- 
ties of  his  position,  and  strive  to  make  his  services  valuable 
to  his  employer.  "  He  occupies  a  position  of  trust  and  re- 
sponsibility, and  no  professional  or  business  man  will  wish 


THE   AMANUENSIS.  231 

to  employ  as  amanuensis  a  person  in  whom  he  cannot  re- 
pose perfect  confidence,"  therefore  he  must  be  honest  and 
faithful.  He  must  be  orderly  in  all  his  work,  and  prompt 
in  its  accomplishment,  neat  in  his  personal  habits,  and  gen- 
tlemanly in  deportment.  "  He  must  possess  the  ability  to 
guard  as  a  sacred  trust  all  the  knowledge  he  may  acquire 
of  his  employer's  affairs." 

Shorthand. —  An  amanuensis  does  not  generally  need 
to  write  as  rapidly  as  a  court,  or  a  general  reporter,  but 
must  have,  at  least,  a  speed  of  one  hundred  to  one  hundred 
and  fifty  words  a  minute  on  avex-age  business  phraseol- 
ogy. He  must  have  an  attentive  ear,  to  catch  all  of  a 
dictated  sentence,  for  it  is  his  duty  to  take  down  every 
word  of  it,  and  if  any  changes  become  necessary  they 
should  be  made  in  the  transcript,  not  in  the  notes.  He 
must  be  able  to  carry  a  sentence  in  the  mind  so  that  if  the 
dictator  speaks  rapidly  away  from  him,  as  is  sometimes 
done  by  a  man  thoroughly  acquainted  with  the  subject  of 
his  lettei',  he  may  hold  the  sentence  in  mind,  and  by 
increasing  speed  catch  also  the  new  sentence  and  overtake 
the  dictation. 

The  ability  to  read  the  notes  readily  and  correctly  is  of 
equal  importance,  so  that  no  time  may  be  lost  in  decipher- 
ing them,  and  no  errors  committed  in  their  transcription. 
One  who  writes  so  slowly  that  he  is  frequently  obliged  to 
request  the  dictator  to  repeat;  or  who  reads  so  poorly  as 
A•^i  to  be  able  instantly  to  read  any  dictated  sentence  that 
may  be  asked  for;  or  who  makes  incorrect  transcripts,  even 
in  the  more  unimportant  parts  of  speech,  will  not  gain  the 
confidence  of  an  employer,  and  will  be  liable  at  any  time 


232  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

to  be  replaced    by   an   amanuensis   who   understands   the 
business. 

The  Writing  Machine —  The  amanuensis  should  have 
a  perfect  acquaintance  with  the  machine  employed,  that 
it  may  be  kept  in  good  working  order,  and  promptly  put 
in  good  order  when  it  fails  to  respond.  He  must  be  able  to 
do  any  kind  of  machine  work  that  may  be  demanded,  do  it 
correctly,  promptly,  neatly,  and  rapidly. 

Spelling,  etc — A  poor  speller  cannot  fill  a  position  of 
any  importance.  No  good  business  man  will  tolerate  poor 
spelling,  incorrect  capitalization,  or  punctuation  in  his  let- 
ters. Even  though  he  may  not  himself  be  expert  in  all  these 
things,  he  will  soon  discern  the  errors  of  his  clerk,  and  po- 
litely, or  otherwise,  dispense  with  his  services.  A  sufficient 
knowledge  of  language  is  required  by  the  amanuensis,  that 
any  errors  in  the  notes  arising  from  hasty  dictation,  or  an 
imperfect  understanding  of  the  dictation,  or  incorrect 
writing  on  the  part  of  the  amanuensis,  may  all  be  elimi- 
nated from  the  transcript. 

The  practical  means  an  employer  has  of  forming  an 
estimate  of  his  amanuensis'  ability  is  in  the  appearance  of 
the  transcripts.  It  does  not  matter  to  the  employer  what 
system  his  clerk  writes,  whether  it  be  a  good  or  a  poor 
short-hand,  whether  he  spent  twelve  months  or  two  months 
in  learning  it;  if  tlie  transcripts  come  out  from  the  ma- 
chine perfect,  like  coins  from  the  mint,  he  compliments 
himself  on  having  secured  a  skilful  amanuensis. 

From  these  considerations,  it  is  evident  that  a  good 
education  will  go  far  toward  making  an  amanuensis  a  val- 
uable   clerk.     Indeed,  without   an   education   it  is  almost 


THE   AMANUENSIS.  ^33 


impossible  to  become  a  capable  amanuensis.  But  no  young 
person  sbould  despair.  The  study  and  practice  of  short- 
hand is  a  whole  education  in  itself.  Three  months  or  six 
months  spent  in  its  acquisition  will  go  far  toward  giving 
an  extended  knowledge  of  words  and  their  uses.  If  one  is 
deficient  in  other  branches,  their  study  and  that  of  short- 
hand mav  be  carried  on  together  until  a  final  success  is 
reached.  ^  Many  a  person  with  limited  educational  advan- 
tages and  acquirements,  has.  in  a  comparatively  short  time, 
become  a  practical  short-hander,  by  making  short-hand  and 
the  dictionary  daily  and  constant  companions. 

A  list  should  be  made  of  words  one  is  in  the  habit  of 
incorrectly  spelling,  or  capitalizing,  which  should  be  fre- 
quently practiced  over  to  correct  the  errors,  until  their 
correct  writing  becomes  a  habit. 

IMPORTANT    SUGGESTIONS  FOR    THE    YOUNG    AMANUENSIS. 

Do  not  seek  a  position  until  you  are  well  qualified  to 

fill  one. 

Having  good  speed  in  writing  short-hand,  and  ability  to 
read  it  without  hesitancy,  together  with  adequate  speed  in 
machine  writing,  practice  copying  letters,  especially  busi- 
ness letters,  until  you  can  print  them  unhesitatingly  in  a 
faultless  and  elegant  style. 

The  ability  to  do  good  work  can  be  acquired  more 
quickly  and  certainly  under  the  care  and  guidance  of  a 
practical  teacher,  in  a  short-hand  atmosphere,  than  in  the 
seclusion  of  solitary  practice;  although  many  have, unaided, 
except    by   books,    overcome    all    obstacles,   and    achieved 

success. 

Positions    are   frequently    secured   by   advertising   tor 


234  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

them  in  the  newspapers,  especially  the  dailies.  In  apply- 
ing for  a  position,  seek  houses  and  firms  doing  a  large 
business  by  correspondence.  Every  kind  of  business  is  car- 
ried on  more  or  less  in  this  way;  even  large  farmers  and 
stock  breeders  now  requii*e  the  aid  of  the  amanuensis. 

In  presenting  your  application  for  a  position,  do  not 
claim  more  ability  than  you  can  demonstrate  you  are  the 
possessor  of,  but  be  satisfied  to  let  the  character  of  your 
work  speak  for  you. 

In  taking  a  trial  dictation,  do  not  lose  your  senses,  but 
keep  cool.  It  will  make  you  master  of  the  position.  Do 
your  work  quietly,  and  without  affectation  or  ostentation. 
For  your  trial,  be  prepared  with  such  note  book  and  pen  or 
pencil  as  you  are  accustomed  to  use,  that  you  may  not  be 
embarrassed  by  the  strangeness  of  material.  Be  careful  to 
sit  near  enough  to  your  dictator  to  clearly  understand  his 
words.  Let  your  ear  be  very  attentive,  not  to  lose  a  word. 
Should  you  fail  to  understand  a  word,  do  not  interrupt  the 
dictation,  but  leave  a  space,  and  when  the  dictation  is  done, 
immediately  ask  for  the  lost  words,  reading  back  a  sentence 
that  your  dictator  may  understand  what  you  seek  for. 
Never,  if  possible  to  avoid  it,  interrupt  the  dictation,  unless 
you  find  it  absolutely  outstripping  you,  in  which  case, 
promptly,  but  deferentially,  request  less  speed.  Write  the 
address  in  your  notes  in  carefully  written  long-hand,  being 
careful  about  the  spelling. 

When  you  have  received  the  dictation,  before  undertak- 
ing the  transcript,  read  it  thoroughly  through,  to  get  the 
subject  clearly  in  your  mind,  to  note  the  end  of  sentences, 
and  the  beginning  of  paragraphs.  In  beginning  the  tran- 
script, be  careful  not  to  crowd  the  complimentary  address. 


THE   AMANUENSIS.  235 

or  body  of  the  letter  on  the  letter  head.  If  it  is  a  short 
letter,  and  your  paper  is  letter  size,  double  space  the  ma- 
chine, and  let  the  letter  occupy  the  middle  of  the  page, 
writing  the  complimentary  address,  after  the  date  is  prop- 
erly placed,  some  distance  below  the  letter  head.  Work 
with  a  confident,  prompt  hand,  careful  to  make  a  success  on 
the  first  slieet.  As  you  get  half  down  your  note  page,  make  a 
strong  mark  with  a  colored  pencil  down  the  page  to  where 
you  have  written,  increasing  the  length  of  the  stroke, 
occasionally,  until  you  reach  the  bottom.  It  will  help  you 
to  keep  the  place  easily,  and  serve  afterward  to  show  that 
the  page  has  been  transcribed.  When  complete,  promptly 
remove  the  letter  from  the  machine,  and  present  it  to  the 
employer  for  his  inspection.  Be  careful  not  to  soil  the 
sheet  with  the  fingers.  If  the  machine  is  not  in  good  order, 
does  not  space  well,  or  run  accurately,  or  the  type  is  dirty, 
so  that  the  printing  is  not  clear,  it  would  be  well  to  remark 
that  with  a  little  attention  to  the  machine,  to  clean  and 
adjust  it,  a  much  neater  letter  might  be  produced. 

In  stipulating  for  your  services,  you  cannot,  unless  you 
are  absolute  master  of  the  situation,  dictate  terms.  If  you 
can  begin  in  a  good  house  at  $75,  or  $65,  or  even  $50  a 
month,  you  can  live  on  that  until  thorough  knowledge  of 
the  work  makes  your  services  more  valuable.  But  do  not 
entertain  such  a  low  estimate  of  the  value  of  your  work  as 
to  be  ready  to  take  a  position  at  any  price.  A  good  sten- 
ographer's services  are  valuable,  and  the  young  stenogra- 
pher who  is  well  posted  ought  to  have  a  feeling  of  self- 
respect,  and  of  appreciation  of  his  art.  that  will  prevent  his 
grovelling  for  a  position,  or  cutting  rates  to  the  disadvan- 
tage of  others,  as  well  as  himself. 


236  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

Having  secured  a  position,  endeavor  to  fill  it.  Do  your 
work  as  though  it  was  your  own,  and  you  meant  to  bring  it 
up  to  the  highest  possible  standard.  Put  your  machine  in 
good  working  order.  Arrange  your  office  for  convenience. 
Have  as  few  appliances  as  possible,  and  these  always  in 
place  and  order.  Have  a  place  for  your  extra  clothing. 
Do  not  make  your  office  a  lounging  place  for  your  mates. 
Be  in  your  office  at  the  proper  time  daily.  If  you  are 
requested  to  work  overtime,  do  it  cheerfully.  "  It  fre- 
quently happens  that  a  very  much  larger  mail  is  received 
on  one  day  than  another,  and  at  such  times  it  is  the  amanu- 
ensis' duty  to  do  all  he  can  to  facilitate  the  speedy  dispatch 
of  replies."  Let  manliness  characterize  all  your  actions. 
Keep  at  your  hand  a  Student's  Dictionary  and  a  Postal 
Guide.  They  will  help  more  than  they  cost  you.  Be  care- 
ful in  addressing  envelopes  to  do  it  correctly  and  in  a  busi- 
ness-like way.  If  more  letters  are  dictated  than  can  be 
gotten  off  by  the  next  mail,  give  the  prefei'ence  to  those 
which  are  the  more  important,  to  get  them  off  first.  Closely 
attend  to  any  instructions  you  may  receive,  that  you  may 
he  able  to  conform  to  them  without  failure.  Keep  a  small 
indexed  book,  with  the  addresses  of  all  the  regular  corre- 
spondents, so  that  you  will  not  be  obliged  to  write  the  full 
address  of  all  sucli  letters  in  your  notes.  It  will  save  time 
for  yourself  and  your  dictator.  Business  men  vary  in  their 
methods  of  copying  their  letters,  and  of  filing  those  they 
receive;  hence  the  amanuensis  who  may  have  this  work  to 
do  will  need  to  keep  his  eyes  open.  Make  a  note  of  all  the 
technical  and  difficult  words  and  phrases  common  to  your 
special  line  of  work,  and  immediately  practice  them  until 
you  have  mastered  them. 


THE   AMAITUENSIS.  237 

COPYING    LETTERS. 

Copies  are  taken  of  letters  to  be  preserved  for  future 
refei'ence.  A  letter  printed  from  the  copying  ribbon,  or 
written  with  copying  ink,  is  copied  by  being  placed  in  a 
blank  book,  with  a  moistened  leaf  of  tissue  paper  placed 
carefully  on  the  printed  surface.  The  book  being  closed,  is 
placed  in  a  copying  press,  in  which,  by  means  of  a  screw, 
heavy  pi'essure  is  applied  to  the  book,  bringing  the  moist- 
ened tissue  and  the  printed  or  written  page  in  close  contact, 
so  that  the  moistened  leaf  takes  up  ink  from  the  printed 
leaf,  and  makes  an  exact  copy,  which  is  read  from  the 
opposite  side  of  the  leaf  on  which  it  appears.  Tn  some  cases 
the  tissue  leaf  is  in  the  copying  book,  where  it  remains, 
other  letters  being  copied  in  the  order  of  their  writing. 
Generally,  several  letters  to  be  copied  are  placed  in  the 
book  at  once,  and  all  copied  by  one  application  of  the  press. 
Some  copy  letters  on  loose  pages,  which  are  filed  with  the 
letters  which  they  are  written  to  answer. 

When  it  is  desired  to  make  several  copies  from  the 
same  lettei*,  it  is  frequently  done  by  means  of  the  hekto- 
graph.  For  this  purpose  the  letter,  printed  from  a  hek- 
tograph  ribbon,  is  placed  face  down,  carefully,  with  slight 
pressure,  on  the  gelatine  surface  of  the'hektograph.  After 
a  moment  it  is  pulled  off,  when  the  ink  is  found  to  be 
imparted  to  the  gelatine  surface,  on  which  it  appears  the 
reverse  of  the  letter.  Leaf  after  leaf  is  now  carefully 
applied  to  and  pulled  off  from  the  gelatine  surface,  each 
having  a  beautiful  cojiy  of  the  printed  letter. 

The  papyrograph  and  electric  pen  are  each  methods  of 
copying,  with  full  instructions  accompanying  each  machine. 


238  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

WRITING    MACHINES. 

It  is  not  the  purpose  of  this  article  to  advocate  any  par- 
ticular machine,  but  to  give  a  few  general  instructions  to 
guide  the  learner. 

The  first  thing  is  to  thoroughly  understand  the  machine 
that  you  may  know  how  to  adjust  and  clean  it,  and  how  to 
put  the  paper  in,  and  regulate  it  so  as  to  begin  and  end  the 
printing  at  your  pleasure.  The  chair  and  table  should  be 
so  adjusted  in  height  that,  in  operating,  you  will  not  be 
obliged  to  lift  the  hands  higher  than  the  elbows  when 
hanging  by  the  side. 

The  second  thing  is  to  learn  the  alphabet  so  thoroughly 
that  any  letter  can  be  touched  without  the  least  hesitancy. 

In  practicing  on  the  caligraph,  or  type-writer,  let  the 
left  hand  do  the  work  over  the  left  half  of  the  key  board 
and  the  right  hand  that  of  the  right  half,  using  the  first 
and  second  fingers  to  do  most  of  the  woi'k,  touching  the 
spacers  of  the  caligraph  with  the  third  and  fourth  fingers, 
and  that  of  the  type-writer  with  the  thumbs.  In  practice, 
the  arms  should  not  rest,  as  students  sometimes  rest  them, 
on  the  front  of  the  caligraph.  After  the  alphabet  is  per- 
fectly familiar,  the  best  finger  exercises  for  elementary 
practice  consist  of  'short  words  repeated,  carefully  accus- 
toming yourself  to  touch  a  key  on  either  half  of  the  key 
board  with  the  nearest  fingers  of  the  corresponding  hand. 

The  touch  of  the  keys  must  be  firm,  quick,  and  light, 
the  fingers  springing  from  a  ke}'  as  quickly  as  touched, 
never  holding  it  down,  careful  to  strike  but  a  single  key  at 
the  same  instant.  A  uniform  touch  is  very  important  to 
handsome  work.     If  some  kevs  are  verv  lightlv  struck  and 


THE  AMANUENSIS.  239 

more  force  applied  to  others,  the  printed  page  will  surely 
show  it,  appearing  clouded  and  unsatisfactory,  while  a  uni- 
form touch  will  make  a  clean  page.  Be  very  particular  to 
cultivate  a  uniform  springing  touch.  Touch  punctuation 
keys  lighter  than  letters,  and  thus  avoid  the  common  fault 
of  driving  the  period  and  comma  through  the  paper.  Drill 
on  this  until  no  signs  of  the  punctuation  marks  appear  on 
the  back  of  the  page.  Practice  short  words,  commas,  and 
periods  over  and  over,  then  more  and  more  difficult  words. 
Practice  familiar  sentences  over  and  over.  Copy  good  liter- 
ature, taking  a  sentence  in  the  mind  at  a  time.  Practice 
business  letters  until  familiar  with  the  location  of  each 
part  of  a  letter.  At  last  practice  much  from  your  short- 
hand notes,  for  this  will  be  your  final  work,  on  which  you 
will  stand  or  fall.  This  is  the  point  at  which  too  many 
young  amanuenses  fail.  One  gets  the  ability  to  pick  out 
his  notes  by  labor,  guessing  at  this  and  that  word,  until 
finally,  after  much  study,  the  writing  is  deciphered,  and  he 
then  thinks  himself  ready  to  take  a  position.  But  this  is 
very  inadequate  preparation  for  an  office;  no  business  man 
will  tolerate  it.  You  must  be  able  to  read  your  notes 
prompthj  and  with  certainty  before  you  are  fit  for  a  posi- 
tion. You  must  be  able  to  sit  down  at  the  machine  with 
the  notes  before  j^ou  and  transcribe  them  without  hesi- 
tancy. When  you  can  do  this  you  may  seek  a  position,  but 
not  a  day  sooner.  You  cannot  acquire  the  ability  to  tran- 
scribe your  notes  without  much  practice.  The  inspector  of 
mails  in  the  Chicago  postoffice  said:  "  I  have  had  an  Eclectic 
in  my  office  a  year,  and  have  never  been  obliged  to  make  a 
single   con-ection   because    of  errors    in   transcribincr   her 


240  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

notes."     This  reputation  we  covet  for  all  Eclectics.     It  is  to 
be  secured  only  by  hard  work,  tvork,  work. 

The  type-writer  practice  which  we  have  delineated  may 
seem  very  simple,  but  many  of  the  best  operators  have 
been  developed  by  this  process. 

SKELKTOy    OF    A    LETTER. 

The  parts  of  a  business  letter  are  the  date  (1),  inscrip- 
tion (2),  complimentary  address  (3),  body  of  the  letter  (4), 
and  the  subscription  (5);  each  must  be  properly  placed  and 
punctuated.  This  mechanical  part  of  the  letter  the  type- 
writer amanuensis  must  practice  until  it  requires  no  appar- 
rent  thought  to  do  it  with  absolute  perfection. 

(1)     Worcester,  Mass.,  July  22,  1885. 
(2)     Messrs.  S.  C.  Griggs  k  Co.,  Chicago,  111.: 

(3)  Gentlemen, — I  have  long  had  a  deep  interest  in  the 
art  of  sliort-hand  writing,  but  after  much  looking  into  the 
art,  concluded  I  had  not  time  to  devote  to  it.  When,  how- 
ever, I  had  opportunity  to  investigate  the  work  by  Mr. 
Cross,  which  you  publish,  I  felt  encouraged  to  undertake 
its  study.  It  seemed  to  me  to  offer  fewer  obstacles  to 
the  learner  than  any  system  I  had  examined.  Now,  after 
having  thoroughly  gone  through  the  text,  and  taught  it  to 
a  fine  class  of  students,  I  am  filled  with  enthusiasm  con- 
cerning it.  It  is,  indeed,  as  you  claim,  simple,  legible, 
brief,  and  easy  to  write. 

Ifc  deserves  to  be  widely  studied,  and  will,  I  have  no 
donl)t,  supersede  the  more  complex  systems.  Wishing  it  a 
popularity  equal  to  its  merits,  I  am. 

(5)     Yours  very  truly, 

A.    H.    HiNMAN. 


THE   AMAIiTUENSIS.  241 

CARE    OF    THK    MACHINE. 

Many  parts  of  the  writing  machine  are  very  delicately 
adjusted,  and,  when  in  the  hands  of  a  rapid  opei-ator,  are 
subject  to  wear  and  strain  every  hour.  In  the  great 
majority  of  machines,  supposed  to  be  entirely  out  of  work- 
ing order,  it  will  be  found  that  the  trouble  can  be  entirely 
removed  by  cleaning  and  adjusting.  Dust  and  dirt  per- 
mitted to  accumulate  about  the  working  parts  of  the 
machine  interfere  with  its  free,  rapid,  and  perfect  action. 
Heavy  oil  applied  to  remedy  the  difficulty  combines  with  the 
dirt,  producing  a  gummy  substance,  which  soon  renders  the 
machine  useless. 

An  inexperienced  operator  will  imagine  the  machine  out 
of  adjustment,  and  give  this  screw  a  turn  forward,  and  that 
a  turn  backward,  at  random,  until  he  can  no  longer  operate 
the  key  board,  and  then  calls  the  repairer,  who  simply 
cleans  the  machine,  and  it  works  like  a  new  instrument. 

Neither  benzine  nor  oil  of  any  kind  should  be  used  about 
a  machine,  unless  it  is  of  the  very  finest  quality,  and  com- 
bined in  the  proportion  of  about  two  parts  of  benzine  to 
one  of  oil ;  and  then  it  should  only  be  used  for  cleaning  the 
machine.  Apply  this  oil  with  a  long-handled  artist's  bristle 
brush,  such  as  can  be  usually  purchased  at  the  stores  for 
fifteen  cents.  Keep  the  oil  clean,  dropping  it  on  the  brush, 
or,  better,  turning  out  a  small  quantity  for  immediate  use 
into  a  small  dish.  It  should  be  used  freely  on  all  parts  of 
the  machine;  then  every  ti'ace  of  oil  and  dirt  removed  by 
use  of  the  same  brush,  operating  the  machine  during  the 
cleaning  to  be  sure  that  all  parts  of  it  have  been  reached. 
The  brush  should  be  frequently  cleaned  by  saturating  it 
16 


242  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAND. 

with  oil,  and  wiping  both  oil  and  dirt  out  of  it  with  a  piece 
of  cotton  cloth.  There  is  usually  no  reason  for  loosening  a 
screw  or  removing  any  part  of  the  instrument.  An  accu- 
mulation of  dust  in  oil  on  the  rod  on  which  the  carriage 
slides  right  and  left  will  prevent  prompt  and  rapid  action. 
What  is  true  of  this  is  true  of  all  parts  of  the  machine. 
Dust,  accumulating  in  oil,  left  on  the  delicate  parts,  clogs 
and  prevents  their  action.  When  the  carriage  seems  reluc- 
tant to  respond,  look  for  dirt  on  the  rod  on  which  it  slides. 
Cut  this  dirt  off  by  means  of  the  compound  oil,  and  wipe 
the  rod  thoroughly  clean.  In  the  type-writer,  clean  the 
grooved  wheels  which  run  on  the  rod,  as  well  as  the  axles 
upon  which  the  wheels  turn.  Thoroughly  clean  until  the 
carriage  will  respond  promptly  to  each  touch.  Do  not 
wind  up  the  mainspring.  It  was  probably  properly  adjusted 
when  you  received  it.  Keep  the  dog  and  toothed  bars 
beneath  the  carriage  of  the  caligraph  thoroughly  clean, 
attending  to  it  frequently. 

Want  of  alignment  is  often  supposed  to  be  the  result  of 
the  misplacement  of  a  type  arm,  when  dirt  alone  is  respon- 
sible. Xo  matter  what  seems  to  be  the  matter  with  a 
machine,  the  chances  are  that  dirt  alone  is  responsible.  It 
is  always  safe  to  assume  that  to  be  the  cause,  and  that  a 
tliorough  cleaning  will  remove  the  difficulty.  If  you  utterly 
fail  by  this  means,  call  for  the  adjuster. 

The  face  of  the  type  should  always  be  kept  perfectly 
clean.  ^lany  a  good  machine  has  been  pronounced  used  up 
when  it  only  needed  the  type  cleaned.  When  in  constant 
use.  the  type  should  be  cleaned  twice  a  day.  Use  no  liquid 
on  the  type,  but  throwing  up  each  type,  hold  it  and  brush 
it  with  a  stiff  tooth  or  hand  brush  until  clean.     Whenever 


THE    AMANUENSIS.  243 

an  e  or  a  or  o  fills  up,  and  makes  a  heavy  or  blurred  im- 
pression, clean  it  at  once.  While  cleaning  the  type,  rub 
your  brush  on  an  old  newspaper  to  clean  it,  and  occasionally 
thoroughly  clean  it  with  the  compound  oil,  taking  pains  to 
remove  it  all  before  applying  to  the  type  face.  Frequently 
clean  out  the  top  of  the  type  bars  all  around  the  circle  by 
thoroughly  brushing  backward  and  forward  with  a  brush, 
frequently  cleaned  in  the  oil,  being  careful  to  leave  no  oil 
or  dirt  in  the  spaces  between  the  bars. 

Never  undertake  to  move  the  type-writer  carriage  until 
the  lever  by  which  it  is  moved  is  sufficiently  depressed  to 
i*aise  the  back  of  the  carriage  out  of  geai',  so  that  it  will 
move  readily  in  either  direction.  One  raking  of  the  spac- 
ing rack  across  the  face  of  the  spacing  dog  is  enough  to  put 
it  out  of  order.  If  by  such  carelessness  the  dog  should  get 
out  of  order,  it  will  need  to  be  cai'efully  readjusted. 

No  one  should  ever  be  allowed  to  put  his  fingers  on 
your  machine,  except  yourself.  Two  minutes  of  an  inex- 
perienced person  at  it  is  often  enough  to  ruin  it.  Persons 
serving  in  an  office  think  that,  having  seen  a  machine  in 
use,  they  can  run  it,  and  attempt  to  do  it,  often  with  ruin- 
ous results.  A  delicate  lady,  insisting  on  trying  her  hand 
on  a  new  machine,  at  the  first  move  struck  three  type  at  once, 
as  some  people  pound  a  piano,  and  went  on  striking  kej'- 
after  key;  and  the  machine  had  to  be  returned  to  Chicago 
for  repairs.  When  your  machine  is  not  in  use,  keep  it 
covered,  and  when  you  leave  the  office,  always  leave  the 
machine  locked. 

Keep  an  eye  to  the  ribbon,  to  be  sure  that  it  always 
moves,  and  reverse  the  action  before  it  rolls  entirely  to  one 


244  ECLECTIC   SHORT-HAN^D. 

wheel.     To  prevent  the  curling  of  the  ribbon,  it  is  best  to 
use  the  edges  first,  and  afterward  the  middle  of  it. 

Keep  the  machine  free  from  dust  by  covering  and  fre- 
quently dusting  it.  Keep  it  free  from  rust  by  daily  running 
over  the  plated  parts  with  a  cloth  moistened  with  the  com- 
posite oil,  wiping  it  di'y.  If  a  letter  flies  out  of  a  type  bar, 
it  can  usually  be  found,  replaced,  and  firmly  pressed  in  by 
means  of  a  piece  of  wood. 


ANXOUXCEMENT. 

The  author  of  Eclectic  Shorthand  publishes  a  semi-monthly 
magazine,  in  the  interest  of  Eclectic  writers,  called  The  Exponent. 

It  contains  shorthand  news  from  all  parts  of  the  country,  con- 
tributed and  original  articles  on  shorthand  topics,  editorial  articles 
and  items,  and  new  developments  in  the  art,  which  has  been  pro- 
gressive from  the  first. 

It  also  contains  two  or  four  pages  of  engraved  shorthand  each 
number,  and  is  not  only  of  interest,  but  of  great  importance,  to  all 
Eclectics. 

Subscription,  $2  per  annum.     Sample  copies,  10c.     Address 

J.  G.  Cross, 
94.  Dearborn  Street,  Chicago. 


r  O 


^mm» 


University  of  California 

SOUTHERN  REGiONAL  LIBRARY  FACILiTY 

405  Hilgard  Avenue,  Los  Angeles,  CA  90024-1388 

Return  this  material  to  the  library 

from  which  it  was  borrowed. 


UiM  k 


Z5« 
C66e 


Cross- 
Ecleclic 


1888   shorthand, 


UC  SOUTHERN  REGIONAL  .SRARV  FACILIT-' 


A     000  564  812     6 


MAY^   1950 


MAY  Z6][m 


:z- 


Z56 

C88e 

1888 


f^---' 


'?:,-■_•  -^. 


i->'- 


^^ 


